Sie sind auf Seite 1von 557

Technical

Publications

2240777–100
Revision 9

SENOGRAPHE DMR+
sm
Service Manual

do not duplicate

CopyrightE 1999, 2001, 2002 by General Electric Co.


ATTENTION
LES APPAREILS À RAYONS X SONT DANGEREUX À LA FOIS POUR LE PATIENT ET POUR LE MANIPULATEUR
SI LES MESURES DE PROTECTION NE SONT PAS STRICTEMENT APPLIQUEES
Bien que cet appareil soit construit selon les normes de sécurité les plus sévères, la source de rayonnement X représente un danger
lorsque le manipulateur est non qualifié ou non averti. Une exposition excessive au rayonnement X entraîne des dommages à l’organisme.
Par conséquent, toutes les précautions doivent être prises pour éviter que les personnes non autorisées ou non qualifiées utilisent cet
appareil créant ainsi un danger pour les autres et pour elles–mêmes.
Avant chaque manipulation, les personnes qualifiées et autorisées à se servir de cet appareil doivent se renseigner sur les mesures de
protection établies par la Commission Internationale de la Protection Radiologique, Annales 60 : Recommandations de la Commission
Internationale sur la Protection Radiologique et les normes nationales en vigueur.

WARNING
X–RAY EQUIPMENT IS DANGEROUS TO BOTH PATIENT AND OPERATOR
UNLESS MEASURES OF PROTECTION ARE STRICTLY OBSERVED
Though this equipment is built to the highest standards of electrical and mechanical safety, the useful x–ray beam becomes a source of
danger in the hands of the unauthorized or unqualified operator. Excessive exposure to x–radiation causes damage to human tissue.
Therefore, adequate precautions must be taken to prevent unauthorized or unqualified persons from operating this equipment or exposing
themselves or others to its radiation.
Before operation, persons qualified and authorized to operate this equipment should be familiar with the Recommendations of the Interna-
tional Commission on Radiological Protection, contained in Annals Number 60 of the ICRP, and with applicable national standards.

ATENCION
LOS APARATOS DE RAYOS X SON PELIGROSOS PARA EL PACIENTE Y EL MANIPULADOR
CUANDO LAS NORMAS DE PROTECCION NO ESTAN OBSERVADAS
Aunque este aparato está construido según las normas de seguridad más estrictas, la radiación X constituye un peligro al ser manipulado
por personas no autorizadas o incompetentes. Una exposición excesiva a la radiación X puede causar daños al organismo.
Por consiguiente, se deberán tomar todas las precauciones necesarias para evitar que las personas incompetentes o no autorizadas
utilicen este aparato, lo que sería un peligro para los demás y para sí mismas.
Antes de efectuar las manipulaciones, las personas habilitadas y competentes en el uso de este aparato, deberán informarse sobre las
normas de protección fijadas por la Comisión Internacional de la Protección Radiológica, Anales No 60: Recomendaciónes de la Comi-
sión Internacional sobre la Protección Radiológica y normas nacionales.

ACHTUNG
RÖNTGENAPPARATE SIND EINE GEFAHR FÜR PATIENTEN SOWIE BEDIENUNGSPERSONAL,
WENN DIE GELTENDEN SICHERHEITSVORKEHRUNGEN NICHT GENAU BEACHTET WERDEN
Dieser Apparat entspricht in seiner Bauweise strengsten elektrischen und mechanischen Sichereitsnormen, doch in den Händen unbe-
fugter oder unqualifizierter Personen wird er zu einer Gefahrenquelle. Übermäßige Röntgenbestrahlung ist für den menschlichen Orga-
nismus schädlich.
Deswegen sind hinreichende Vorsichtsmaßnahmen erforderlich, um zu verhindern, daßunbefugte oder unqualifizierte Personen solche
Geräte bedienen oder sich selbst und andere Personen deren Bestrahlung aussetzen können.
Vor Inbetriebnahme dieses Apparats sollte sich das qualifizierte und befugte Bedienungspersonal mit den geltenden Kriterien für den ge-
fahrlosen Strahleneinsatz durch sorgfältiges Studium des Hefts Nr. 60 der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz (ICRP) vertraut
machen: Empfehlungen der Internationalen Kommission für Strahlenschutz und anderer nationaler Normenbehörden.
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

1 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1–1 Chapter Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1–2 Inspection for Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
SECTION 2 – DESCRIPTION OF DELIVERED EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
SECTION 3 – HOW TO USE THE CONSOLE IN INSTALLATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
3–1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
3–2 Application and Installation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
3–3 Description of the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
3–4 Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5
3–5 Installation Menu Tree Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–9
3–6 Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
3–7 Saved Parameters and Checksum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–23
3–8 Re–loading of Default (Initial) Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–24
3–9 Returning to the Application Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
3–10 Generator Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
3–10–1 Gantry Present/Absent (PRS_A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–25
3–10–2 Display of Parameters Following an Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–26
3–10–3 Calendar and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
3–10–4 Visual Representation of Numerical Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–27
3–10–5 Visual Display of Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
3–10–6 Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–28
3–10–7 Entry of an Alpha–Numeric Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–29
3–11 Principles of Generator Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
3–11–1 Vocabulary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
3–11–2 Use of the First Trigger/Second Trigger Buttons During Generator Installation . . . . . . 1–30
3–11–3 Inhibit Conditions Due to Gantry Absence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–30
3–11–4 Inhibit Conditions Due to Grid Absence/Presence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
3–11–5 Displayed Messages During Exposure–Producing Calibration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
3–11–6 Other Displayed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
SECTION 4 – SITE PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–31
SECTION 5 – INSTALLATION STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–32

i
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

2 CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
SECTION 1 – INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
SECTION 2 – GENERATOR CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
SECTION 3 – GANTRY CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
SECTION 4 – AEC CALIBRATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
SECTION 5 – AEC CALIBRATION ON STEREOTIX 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
SECTION 6 – RE–CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE OPTICAL DENSITY
IN NON–STEREOTIX 2 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
SECTION 7 – CUSTOMER REQUESTED RE–CALIBRATION OF STEREOTIX 2 MODE
REFERENCE OPTICAL DENSITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3

3 JOB CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1


JOB CARD IST 001 – CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . 3–3
JOB CARD IST 002 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE SCALE
FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
JOB CARD IST 003 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
JOB CARD IST 004 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASUREMENT
AND SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
JOB CARD IST 005 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY AS A FUNCTION
OF ITS VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
JOB CARD IST 006 – SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
JOB CARD IST 007 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A GIVEN
SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
JOB CARD IST 008 – UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
JOB CARD IST 009 – PHYSICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55
JOB CARD IST 010 – CONNECTING THE CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–57
JOB CARD IST 011 – CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69
JOB CARD IST 012 – LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–75
JOB CARD IST 013 – CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE
COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79
JOB CARD IST 014 – CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR A GIVEN
SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–89
JOB CARD IST 015 – CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION ARM ANGULATION . . . . . . . . 3–97
JOB CARD IST 016 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE MA MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . 3–99
JOB CARD IST 017 – CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103
JOB CARD IST 018 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS . . . 3–109
JOB CARD IST 019 – CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STEREOTIX 2 MODE
FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115
JOB CARD IST 020 – AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–123
JOB CARD IST 021 – CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING
OF X–RAY BEAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–125

ii
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

JOB CARD IST 022 – CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–131


JOB CARD IST 023 – CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . 3–133
JOB CARD IST 024 – MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION FORCE TESTS . . . 3–135
JOB CARD IST 025 – CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT . . . . . . 3–139
JOB CARD IST 026 – CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–143
JOB CARD IST 027 – CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–145
JOB CARD IST 028 – LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–159
JOB CARD IST 029 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE REFERENCE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . 3–165
JOB CARD IST 030 – CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT,
COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–169
JOB CARD IST 031 – TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON EXPOSED FILM . . . . . . 3–173
JOB CARD IST 032 – REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE COVERS
AND PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–177
JOB CARD IST 033 – PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY TESTING . . . . . . . . . 3–181
JOB CARD IST 034 – CHECKING SAFE–LIGHTING AND FILM PROCESSING . . . . . . . . 3–187
JOB CARD IST 035 – REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–191
JOB CARD IST 036 – ADJUSTMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–195
JOB CARD IST 037 – JUMPERS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–205
JOB CARD IST 038 – REGULATORY AND SAFETY LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–209
JOB CARD IST 039 – MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP STRATEGY
FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–215
JOB CARD IST 040 – SETTING OF ELEVATOR UPPER TRAVEL LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–219
JOB CARD IST 041 – GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–223
JOB CARD IST 042 – CONNECTING ROOM LAMPS AND ROOM DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–231
JOB CARD IST 043 – DMR INSTALLATION FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–234
JOB CARD IST 044 – SETTING PADDLE DEFORMATION PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–249
JOB CARD IST 045 – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FOLLOW–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–251
JOB CARD IST 046 – CHECKS ON PRE-EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–255
JOB CARD IST 047 – CHECK OF VIEWBOX(ES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–261
JOB CARD IST 048 – CHECK OF SENSITOMETRIC STABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–265
JOB CARD IST 050 – A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR CONTACT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–269
JOB CARD IST 051 – A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR MAGNIFICATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–271

iii
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

CHAPTER TITLE PAGE

4 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1


SECTION 1 – ERROR CODE STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
SECTION 2 – ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
SECTION 3 – ERROR CODES: KNOWN ROOT CAUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20

5 SIGNAL LISTS / GLOSSARIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

6 RENEWAL PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1

7 PLANNED MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1


SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
JOB CARD PM001 – DMR PLANNED MAINTENANCE STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
JOB CARD PM002 – SITE STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
JOB CARD PM003 – REMOVE SYSTEM COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
JOB CARD PM004 – CHECK AEC MAX EXPOSURE TIME SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
JOB CARD PM005 – CHECK EMERGENCY STOP BUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
JOB CARD PM006 – CHECK COMPRESSION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
JOB CARD PM008 – CHECK CABLE GROUNDING AND X–RAY TUBE SAFETY . . . . . . 7–19
JOB CARD PM009 – INSPECT LEAD GLASS SHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
JOB CARD PM010 – CHECK HV UNIT AND HV CABLE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
JOB CARD PM011 – CLEAN SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
JOB CARD PM012 – CHECK +5V SUPPLY ON GENERATOR CPU BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–27
JOB CARD PM013 – CHECK COLUMN UP/DOWN MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
JOB CARD PM014 – CHECK ARM ROTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
JOB CARD PM015 – CHECK COMPRESSION FORCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
JOB CARD PM016 – CHECK BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
JOB CARD PM018 – CHECK PHOTOCELL POSITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
JOB CARD PM019 – CHECK FORMAT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
JOB CARD PM020 – CHECK TUBE HOUSING ARM DETENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
JOB CARD PM021 – CHECK MAGNIFICATION SENSORS AND SID SENSORS . . . . . . . . 7–47
JOB CARD PM022 – CHECK BUCKY AND TEST BUCKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
JOB CARD PM023 – CHECK STEREOTIX OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
JOB CARD PM024 – CHECK CHAIR OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
JOB CARD PM025 – REPLACE PADDLE WITH A NOTCH OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55

iv
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

REVISION HISTORY

REV DATE TYPE OF MODIFICATION


0 March 13, 1999 Initial release.

1 August 1999 Corrections

2 December 1999 Renewal Parts updated with CPUs V5.09 and V5.10

3 February 2000 Program Marble (DMR+ M5) SPR BUCge45373

4 June 2000 Correction to test point nos. in IST 037; IST 046 warm-up mAs value corrected; added
value limit for measured value entries in IST 030; updated margin settings in IST 027.
Renewal parts list updated: corrected p/n for compression spring kit on Ill. 6-3; added part
no. for line filter box (FRU 2) on Ill. 6-10; corrected p/n for bearing item 3 on Ill. 6–20;
added kit for cable on belt to Ill 6-26; corrected p/n for collimator item 25 on Ill. 6-29;
corrected part nos. for 2-pedal and 4-pedal footswitches on Ill. 6-17; added pushbutton kit
on Ill. 6-30; removed photomultiplier kit and cell disassembly tool from Ill. 6-31; cor-
rected p/n for bucky CDRH on Ill. 6-36; removed markers from Ill. 6-36; added sets of
Flip markers on Ill. 6-38; added p/ns for dataflash cable, lexan part for 24x30 paddle, spot
paddles, and axillary paddle on Ill. 6-38.

5 February 2001 Service Manual release synchronized with FMI 11395.

Page 1–41: in table 1, addition of ”A0, A1 and A2 values for MinR 2000,
Agfa HDR–C and Fuji ADM films.
Page 1–44: addition of note ”use calibration form IST043 ...”
Page 1–45: AEC flowchart: IST046 moved after IST007.
IST007: addition of illustration 1: ”IST007 flowchart” + modifications.
IST007: corrections of menu path: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/COPY/...
instead of SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/COPY/...
IST013 : section 5.9.5: indication of where to note down the records (in IST043,
IST013 data section).
IST014: section 5.5.8: indication of where to note down the records (in IST043,
IST014 data section).
IST043: update of record tables according to IST007 modifications.
SPR BUCge56711: addition of new error codes 171/015 through 171/024
Page 4–19: addition of recommended actions for 171/015 through 171/024 error codes
Page 6–63: changes in FRU level: P/N 45560093 is FRU 2 and 2128546 is FRU 1.
IST027: replacement of IST030 reference by (IST029 + IST030)
SPR BUCge59779: Job Card IST022. Addition of 5.1Vdc adjustment.
SPR BUCge59962: removal of P/N 2235097, not FRU.
Page 6–27: new 400PL3 P/N=2274829–5
Page 6–49: new 800PL3 P/N=2274828–5
Page 1–34: removal of step 5 : Unlock the tube angulation....
Page 1–23: removal of illustration 1–17 (DOSE menu not used).
IST010: modification of Emergency cable connection as follows:
table 1: Emergency stop connected to TB1 Autotransformer
addition of TB1 location in illustration 3
Section 5.7: emergency stop wire is connected to TB1 (orange connector).

...

NUMBER FORMAT REVISION


2240777–100TPH A4 9

v
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

...

IST033: addition of section 6.1: Check Angle sensor.


IST041: addition of recommended action page 3–226.
IST015 : addition of a note after section 5.2. Refer to error code list...
IST046: improvement of procedure.
Page 1–38 and 1–39 and Job Card IST027: New values for collimator margins.

6 March 2001 Service Manual release synchronized with Sapphire M3.


Addition of Job Card IST050 and update of AEC/AOP calibration flowchart (SPR
BUCge62286).

7 August 2001 Service Manual release synchronized with Sapphire Post M4 (1).
Addition of Job Card IST051 and update of AEC/AOP calibration flowchart
(SPR BUCge66903)

8 January 2002 Program: Crystal M4


– SPR BUCge69149: SM introduction.
– SPR BUCge58594: IST022 updated for locking the potentiometer.
– Introduction of V6.22 software
– Introduction of a new console called “Console 2001”.
– New paddle with notch and carbon fiber bucky cover introduction.
– Update Renewal Parts.
– Update of some DMR service menus names and paths.

9 September 2002 Generic SPR BUCge81369


Program: Optimized Planned Maintenance (Jamboree)
– Create chapter 7 with PM job cards.
– SPR BUCge56259: Introduce new generator interface board (400–PL2) 2198369–3 in
renewal parts.
– SPR BUCge76813: Add paddle rail for accessory trolley 2335958 in renewal parts.

Regulatory and Safety Labelling SPR BUCge81337


– Added affix product id labels Job Card IST038

MQSA paddle adjustment. BUCge81771.


– Added step 24 to ch. 1 sec. 5 Installation Steering, p. 1–41.
– Updated ch. 6 renewal parts, reminders to order FMI 11468 when replacing paddles in
countries subject to MQSA (pages 6–79 and 6–89).

vi
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION PAGE REVISION


NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER

Title page 9 3-1 through 3-274 9 6–i & 6-ii 9

i through viii 9 4-1 through 4-20 9 6-1 through 6-90 9

1-1 through 1–46 9 5-i & 5-ii 9 7–1 through 7–56 9

2-1 through 2–4 9 5-1 through 5-54 9

This document is using the Conditional selection. It is a slave


document.
Note for To maintain this document it is mandatory to use the “Master File”
the Technical Writer 2309391–100 as the Interleaf source.
This “Master File” contains a “Read me” which explains how to
proceed.

NUMBER FORMAT REVISION


2240777–100TPH A4 9

vii
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

Blank page

viii
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHAPTER 1 – INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION

1–1 Chapter Overview

This chapter presents the Senographe DMR installation procedures. The wiring and room
layout requirements for the product are covered in the Pre–Installation Manual.

1–2 Inspection for Damage

The Senographe DMR was completely inspected for proper operation and appearance before
shipment. However, it is necessary to inspect the product after the shipment is received. Visu-
ally inspect the packages for any apparent damage. If there are signs of damage, refer the mat-
ter to the shipping company immediately.

Open the packages and refer to the Product Delivery Instructions (PDI). Verify that items on
the list are present in the package. Carefully examine the contents for small parts.

SECTION 2
DESCRIPTION OF DELIVERED EQUIPMENT

D See the Pre-installation Manual for a description of the delivered equipment.


SECTION 3
HOW TO USE THE CONSOLE IN INSTALLATION MODE

3–1 Introduction

This section describes how to use the Senographe DMR console during installation.

3–2 Application and Installation modes

Throughout the Senographe DMR documentation, reference is made to the application mode
and to the installation mode to differentiate between normal operation of the product by a
doctor and operation of the product during installation.

Each time the Senographe DMR is turned on the software automatically starts up in applica-
tion mode.

For information on using the Senographe DMR in application mode, refer to the Operator
Manual.

Two major Senographe DMR components must be installed – the generator and the gantry.
Therefore, there are two separate installation phases, one for the generator and one for the
gantry (see Section 3–4).

1–1
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

3–3 Description of the Console


INSTALLATION

Illustration 1–1 shows the Senographe DMR consoles. When the Senographe DMR is in
application mode, the six keys below the display window correspond to the functions that
their respective symbol markings indicate (focal spot, track, filter, etc. – refer to the Operator
Manual for explicit details).

On the other hand, when the Senographe DMR is in installation mode, the function of each
of these six keys depends on the procedure being performed and is displayed on the bottom
line of the display window adjacent to the corresponding key.

To enter installation mode, press the SETUP key once. To return immediately to

application mode, press the SETUP key again.

Illustration 1–3 shows the console before and after entry to the installation mode.

Section 1 of this illustration shows a typical console display during normal application mode
use.

Section 2 shows the appearance of the display window when, having started from application

mode, the SETUP key is pressed for the first time.

Section 4 shows the appearance of the display window when the password has already been

entered once, and starting from application mode, the SETUP key is pressed.

1–2
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–1
SENOGRAPHE DMR CONSOLES

INSTALLATION
Control Console CDRH

Control Console 2001 (in forward production from february 2002)

1–3
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

3–4 Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console
INSTALLATION

Menu access paths: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL OR SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

To access the generator or gantry installation mode starting from application mode, follow
this sequence:

1. Press the SETUP key .

2. For access to the generator and gantry installation menus, change the position of the in-
stallation menu enable switch (switch B1–8 on generator CPUboard 400–PL3) from its
position prior to power-up to the opposite position (see Illustration 1–2).
The installation menus can also be accessed by password. Select the PASSWORD key,
enter your password (given at the training course) (see Illustration 1–3, Section 3).

3. Select the sub–assembly to be installed (GENE or ARM for generator or gantry, respec-
tively).
4. For the gantry ONLY, press the VALID key.
5. Select the INSTAL menu.
Note: The MAINTENANCE menu is not accessible during installation of the Senographe
DMR.

6. You now have access to the installation menus of the sub–assembly selected (generator
or gantry).
Note: The position of the installation menu enable switch is memorized each time the Seno-
graphe DMR is turned on. Until the machine is again turned off (or the default parame-
ters are re–loaded via the generator’s CLEAR menu, see Section 3–8), this memorized
position is the installation-menu-access-disabled position, and the opposite position is
the installation-menu-access-enabled position. The significance of the switch’s position
thus depends upon its position at power–up.

When you have finished using the Senographe DMR installation mode, you must
CAUTION turn off the Senographe DMR before handing over the machine to the user. In this
way, when the machine is turned on again, access to the installation mode will be
automatically locked out (see Note above).

Illustration 1–3 shows the sequence for accessing generator installation mode.

1–4
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–2
LOCATION OF INSTALLATION MENU ENABLE SWITCH

INSTALLATION
GENE CPU BOARD 400–PL3

B1
?
P1 P2

1–5
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–3
SEQUENCE FOR ENTERING GENERATOR INSTALLATION MODE (REPRESENTED ONLY IN THE CASE OF A CONTROL CONSOLE
2001 OPERATION IS SIMILAR WITH CONTROL CONSOLE CDRH (REFER TO ILLUSTRATION 1–1))
INSTALLATION

1
APPLICATION

SETUP

SMALL AUTO AUTO +0 A

Nb of exposures
VIEW MEDICAL LANGUAGE PASSWD

1–6
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

INSTALLATION
APPLICATION

ENTER YOUR PASSWORD: Nb of exposures SETUP


1 2 3 4 5 6

PASSWORD

4
APPLICATION

SETUP
Nb of exposures
GENE MEDICAL LANGUAGE ARM CLINIC

GENE ARM

1–7
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

5
INSTALLATION

APPLICATION

SETUP
GEMS–E VX.XX GEN DD.MM.YY
INSTAL MAINT

GENE ARM

INSTAL

6
APPLICATION

SETUP

LAST INSTAL (D/M/Y H:M) 28/03/96 10:24


CKSUM GENE

GENE ARM

INSTAL

CKSUM GENE

1–8
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

3–5 Installation Menu Tree Structure

INSTALLATION
The various installation menus are accessible via a tree structure which is shown in Illustra-
tions 1-5 through 1–13.

1–9
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

Blank page
INSTALLATION

1–10
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–4
MEDICAL
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE

INSTALLATION
KEY
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat-
ing the kV knob.
APPLICATION MODE
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod-
ified or entered.

indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display


other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in
a string being entered.
 These selections appear only when
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in the password has been entered.
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc- Select arm/gene install
tions for the calibration in question before using these
menus). GENE  MEDICAL LANGUAGE ARM  PASSWORD

Enter your password


1 2 3 4 5 6

installation steering step


13.–b.–xi
GEMS-E (gen soft version) GEN (release date) MEDICAL SET–UP Select LANGUAGE ARM ACCESS
INSTAL MAINT SPEED FORCE DECOMP BEEP HEIGHT FILM FRANC ENGL DEUTS ESPAN ITALI PORTU VALID

see illustration 1-6 COMPRESSION SPEED WITH BEEP GEMS-E (Arm soft version) ARM (release date)
CASSETTE DETECTION
FAST SLOW YES NO INSTAL MAINT
YES
YES NO

MAX COMPRESS FORCE daN: (value)


+ – VAL
END OF EXPOSURE DECOMP
YES NO
DECOMPRESSION HEIGHT : xx cm
+ – VALID
A
see illustration 1-12

1–11
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–5
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (cont’d)
SETUP
 These selections appear only when the password
INSTALLATION

KEY has been entered. See illustration 1–5.

(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- APPLICATION MODE
Select arm/gene install
GENE  MEDICAL LANGUAGE ARM  PASSWORD
GENE ARM
ing the kV knob.
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod-
ified or entered.
GEMS-E (gen soft version) GEN (release date)
INSTAL MAINT
G
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display PADDLE PARAMETERS
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in
18x24 24x30 MAG STEREO
a string being entered.
A
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in
18x24 PARAM display (2 values)
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc-
see illustration 1–12 Same menu
tions for the calibration in question before using these LAST CALIB (D/M/Y H:M) CHANGE
structure
menus). CKSUM GENE as 1824

sections 3–7 and 3–8

CHECKSUM OF SAVED PARAM GENERATOR CALIBRATION


18x24 PARAM CHANGE offs= (values)
CKSUM CLEAR CONFIG GENE AOP DOSE PROD
NEXT VALID
USING THE CLEAR FUNCTION WILL ENTAIL A
COMPLETE RE–CALIBRATION OF THE
WARNING SENOGRAPHE DMR GENERATOR AND AEC. GENERATOR CONFIGURATION THIS MENU IS
OF NO USE TO
THIS MENU CONSISTS OF PRO- AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE AOP
DUCTION TEST PROCEDURES
THE SERVICE THAT ARE OF NO USE TO THE
CONFIG DISP IMAGE DATE EVOLUTION ENGINEER. SERVICE ENGINEER.
FILM APOLLO PELOTE
CLEAR ALL SAVED PARAM
VALID
Not used for DMR
installation steering step 13.–a. G
GENERATOR CALIBRATION
section 3–10–2 TUBE HTR_SCL BIAS KV mA_meas Not applicable
GENERATOR CONFIGURATION EXPOSURE PARAM DISPLAY GENERATOR EVOLUTION for DMR
TUBE PMAX MASMAX PRES. T_MAX RINIT YES NO 300PL3

RE–INITIALIZING THE TUBE

WARNING
WILL ENTAIL RE–CALIBRATING
THE TUBE HEATER CURRENT.
USE THE FUNCTION ONLY WHEN
YOU HAVE REPLACED THE X–
B C
RAY TUBE.

TYPE OF TUBE 2foc/2met/1ang MAX AUTHORIZED POWER POWE = (value) section 3–10–3
FOCUS ANODE MODEL DCHARG 3.0KW 3.5KW 4.0KW 4.5KW 5.0KW RE–INITIALISATION DATE and TIME UPDATE WITH THE BOARD 300PL3
INIT_TUBE INIT_ENERGY DAY HOUR FILM (AOP)
YES NO
CELL ALGO COPY TYPE

FOCUS SELECTION bifocus TYPE OF ANODE 2Metal MAX MAS ALLOWED mAs=(value) MAX EXPOSURE TIME T(s)=(value)
DATE DD/MM/YY (values) TIME HH:MN:SS (values)
SINGLE DUAL DM SMSA SMDA NEXT VALID NEXT VALID
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID

E
MODEL OF TUBE : (Maxiray 70TH–F) SUB–SYSTEMS PRESENCE TUBE RE–INITIALISATION
Not used for DMR PRS–B PRS–DS PRS–IDC VALID
GS412 70TH–F 70TH–D

RESET TUBE ENERGY (Reset done)


GS412 70TH–F 70TH–D
VALID VALID VALID
ARM PRESENCE
YES NO
DIGITAL STATION PRESENCE
YES NO
IMAGE DETECTOR CTRL PRES.
YES NO
VALID
D

1–12
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

GENE
ILLUSTRATION 1–6
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (cont’d)
B
TUBE HTR_SCL

INSTALLATION
KEY
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat-
ing the kV knob.
GENERATOR CALIBRATION
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod- TUBE HTR_SCL BIAS KV mA_meas
ified or entered.

indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display


other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in
a string being entered.

indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in


C
Job Card IST 001
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc-
tions for the calibration in question before using these
menus).

TUBE CALIBRATION
HEATER HTR_D CTUBE CTubH WarmUp
Job Card IST 020 HTR_SCL HARDWARE CALIB
TRACK1 TRACK2
WARNING
Same menu
Job Card IST 003 THE TWO MENUS CTUBE AND CTUBH ARE
TUBE WARM–UP x/y kV structure as
NOT INTENDED FOR SERVICE USE. for TRACK1
HEATER: Select Foc/Track
HTR_SCL HARDWARE TRACK 1
LF/MO SF/MO LF/RH SF/RH
CALIB PARAM

HTR_DELTA Parameters HTR_SCL HARDWARE TRACK 1 PARAM HTR_SCL track 1 x=(2 values)
LF/MO SF/MO LF/RH SF/RH 1st pt 2nd pt calcul CHANGE

THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN


HEATER: LF/MO CALIB HEATER: SF/MO CALIB HEATER: LF/Rh CALIB HEATER: SF/Rh CALIB BOTH FILAMENT CURRENT VALUES HAVE
BEEN MEASURED AND ENTERED VIA THE
CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM Same menu 1ST PT AND 2ND PT MENUS.
structure as
Same menu for 1st pt
structure as PARAM HTR_SCL modif track 1 x=(value)
for LF/MO VALID
NEXT VALID
HEATER: LF/MO CALIB
C_GAIN I_VALUE Same menu
structure as
for LF/MO LF/Mo HTR_DELTA display DEL_x=(3 values) HTR_SCL CALIB TRACK1 PT1 ref=(value)
CMDE CALIB Measi THE MENU ICH_M, WHICH IS USED TO ENTER
THE MEASURED FILAMENT CURRENT VALUE
FOUND IN THE CALIB MENU, IS ONLY ACCESSI-
BLE AFTER USE OF THE CALIB MENU.
Cathode Gain LF/MO GK_Ax=(3 values)
Currents LF/MO (28 values kV/A)
CHANGE CHANGE
HTR_SCL TRACK1 PT1 modif ref=(value) HTR_SCL TRACK1 1st point meas=(value)
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID
Modif LF/MO cathode gain GK_Ax=(value) Currents LF/MO modif (value) (value)
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID

1–13
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

GENE
ILLUSTRATION 1–7
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (cont’d)
C
BIAS KV mA_meas
INSTALLATION

KEY
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat-
ing the kV knob. GENERATOR CALIBRATION
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod- TUBE HTR_SCL BIAS KV mA_meas
ified or entered.
Job Card IST 016
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in mA MEASUREMENT
a string being entered.
B CALIB PARAM

indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in


order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc- Job Card IST 002
tions for the calibration in question before using these Job Card IST 017 mA MEASURE CALIBRATION
menus). kV CALIBRATION CALIB I_MEAS CALCUL
CALIB PARAM
FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE
CALIB PARAM VOLTAGE
THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN X–
kV PARAMETERS x=(2 values) RAY TUBE CURRENT HAS BEEN MEASURED
AND ENTERED VIA THE ”CALIB” AND
”I_MEAS” MENUS.
CHANGE
FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE CALIB
mA MEASUREMENT CALC
1st pt 2nd pt calcul FOCAL BIAS VOLT display x=(2 values)
VALID
CHANGE PARAM kV MODIF x=(value)
NEXT VALID MEASURED CURRENT meas=(value)
FOCAL BIAS VOLT 1st pt
CALIB MeasV NEXT VALID

FOCAL BIAS VOLT modif x=(value)


THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN NEXT VALID
1ST PT FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE VALUE HAS
BEEN MEASURED VIA THE ”CALIB” MENU.
kV CALIBRATION mA MEASURE CALIBRATION meas=x mA

FOCAL BIAS VOLT measure meas=(value) 1st pt 2nd pt calcul MEASUR

NEXT VALID
THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN
BOTH FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE VALUES HAVE BOTH HV VALUES HAVE BEEN MEASURED
BEEN MEASURED AND ENTERED VIA THE AND ENTERED VIA THE ”1ST PT” AND ”2ND PRESSING THE ”MEASUR” KEY UP-
”1ST PT” AND ”2ND PT” MENUS. PT” MENUS. DATES THE DISPLAYED VALUE OF
Same menu THE THEORETICAL MEASURED X–
FOCAL BIAS VOLT calcul structure as RAY TUBE CURRENT VALUE
for 1st pt
FOCAL BIAS VOLT 2nd pt VALID VALID
FOCAL BIAS VOLT 1st pt ref=70.0
CALIB MeasV mA MEASUREMENT PARAMETER f/mA=(value)
CHANGE
FOCAL BIAS VOLT Display Focus/Track kV CALIB 1st point ref=(value) kV
THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN
2ND PT FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE VALUE HAS CHANGE
BEEN MEASURED VIA THE ”CALIB” MENU. REF CALIB kV_M mA MEAS PARAM MODIF f/mA=(value)

THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN NEXT VALID


1ST PT KV VALUE HAS BEEN MEASURED
FOCAL BIAS VOLT 2nd pt ref=250.0 FOCAL BIAS VOLT measure meas=(value) VIA THE ”CALIB” MENU.

NEXT VALID FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE modif x/y (value) kV REFERENCE 1st point ref=(value) kV kV CALIB 1st point MEASURED kV 1st meas=(value)
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID NEXT VALID

1–14
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

(GENE)
ILLUSTRATION 1–8
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (cont’d) AOP

INSTALLATION
KEY D
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- CELL COPY
ing the kV knob.
AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE AOP
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod-
CELL ALGO COPY TYPE
ified or entered.
default = A nSC –> E SCR
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display Job Card IST 007
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in
a string being entered. PARAMETERS DUPLICATION (fsc) (screen) –> (fsc) (screen)
SOURCE TARG COPY
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc-
tions for the calibration in question before using these
CELL CALIBRATION
HV/DAC PM/HV STER
E
menus).
Job Card IST 004 SOURCE CHOICE(fsc)/(scr/nscr) TARGET CHOICE (fsc)/(scr/nscr) ENABLE COPY

PM_HV/DAC CALIBRATION Job Card IST 005 SCREEN FSC SCREEN FSC VALID

FREQ/HV HV/DAC PM/PM_HV calibration


CALIB PARAM
PM_HV/DAC Calibration Job Card IST 018
CALIB PARAM SCREEN PRESENT (yes/no) SCREEN PRESENT (yes/no)
FREQUENCY/PM_HV GAIN
PM/PM_HV PARAM display x=(3 values) YES NO YES NO
CALIB PARAM
PM/PM–HV calibration CHANGE
SOURCE FSC CHOICE FSC=(fsc) TARGET FSC CHOICE FSC=(fsc)
FREQ/PM_HV GAIN display F/HV=(value) PM_HV/DAC Calibration
FSC=A FSC=B FSC=C FSC=D FSC=E FSC=A FSC=B FSC=C FSC=D FSC=E
CHANGE START
PM/PM_HV PARAM change x=(value)
NEXT VALID

FREQ/PM_HV GAIN change F/HV=(value)


NEXT VALID PM_HV/DAC PARAM display x=(2 values) STEREOTIX CELL calib grid present/absent
CHANGE CALIB PARAM

FREQUENCY/PM_HV GAIN ref=(value)


REF CALIB HV_M CALC PM_HV/DAC PARAM change x=(value) STEREOTIX CELL calib STEREOTIX PARAM display x=(4 values)
NEXT VALID CELL CALIB CALC CHANGE

Send PM/HV ref FREQ/PM_HV calcul


START STOP VALID STEREOTIX PARAM change x=(value)
Cell Selection STEREOTIX CELL calib
NEXT VALID
FREQ/PM_HV REF modif ref=(value) NORMAL LEFT CENT RIGHT
NEXT VALID FREQ/PM_HV Measure meas=(value)
NEXT VALID
STEREOTIX CELL calib calc
default=+7.000E+2
VALID

1–15
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

(GENE)
ILLUSTRATION 1–9
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (cont’d) E ALGO
INSTALLATION

KEY
AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE AOP
PM YIELD REF ENERGY
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat-
ing the kV knob. CELL ALGO COPY TYPE (CELL GAIN)
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod-
ified or entered.
AEC/AOP CALIBRATION
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display
FSC=A FSC=B FSC=C FSC=D FSC=E
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in
a string being entered. D D STATUS: (VALUE)
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in A B C
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc- Same menu
tions for the calibration in question before using these structure
menus). as FSC=A
AEC/AOP CALIBRATION FSC=(fsc)
VALID NAME TYPE STRAT CALIB
Job Card IST 006
Job Card IST 006
FSC validation Job Card IST 006
Select FSC Name FSC (fsc)=(name) ALGORITHM CALIBRATION
YES NO Job Card IST 006
NEXT VALID PM_yld LNRT Energ Corr
SCREEN/FILM STRATEGY

THIS MENU IS CURRENTLY


MEDIUM SLOW FAST V_SLOW V_FAST S_FAST
NON–FUNCTIONAL.
Job Cards IST 014 and IST 019

PM YIELD
Job Card IST 007 REFERENCE ENERGY
CALIB PARAM CONFIG
F
SCREEN GRID CALIB
REF_ENERGY CALIBRATION mAs=(value)

FILM/SCREEN CALIBRATION mAs CALIB OD_MS CALC CELL MODE SELECTION


SCREEN PRESENT
YES NO
CALIB PARAM F REF_ENERGY PARAM menu
GAMMA ENR_R OD_R SCALE D_STEP
NORMAL STEREO

REF ENERGY calculation for Stereotix 2 mode


FSC PARAM display REF ENERGY CALIBRATION VALID
CALIBRATION WITH GRID
CONFIG PARAM REFERENCE ENERGY display OD_x=(7 values)
YES NO
REFERENCE ENERGY display ENERG=(value) CHANGE
Measured density OD=(value)
FILM/SCREEN CALIBRATION CHANGE
NEXT VALID
THICK CALIB CALC
Select Configuration THE VALUE OF ENERG IS
CALCULATED DURING THE
Mo/Mo Mo/Al Mo/Rh Rh/Al Rh/Rh WARNING CALIBRATION PROCEDURE REFERENCE ENERGY change OD_x=(value)
AND MUST NEVER BE MODI-
FIED MANUALLY FOR ANY NEXT VALID
Select plexi thickness x cm REASON WHATSOEVER.
FSC PARAM display x=(6 values) mAs Selection mAs=(value)
2 cm 4 cm 6 cm PARAMETERS calculation
CHANGE NEXT VALID REFERENCE ENERGY display GAMMA=(value) REFERENCE ENERGY display OD_r=(value)
VALID
CHANGE CHANGE
Same menu
FILM/SCREEN PARAM change x=(value) structure as
THE VALUE OF GAMMA IS for OD_R
NEXT VALID CALCULATED DURING THE REFERENCE ENERGY change OD_r=(value)
WARNING CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
AND MUST NEVER BE MODI- NEXT VALID
FIED MANUALLY FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER.

1–16
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

(GENE)
ILLUSTRATION 1–10
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (cont’d) F ALGO

INSTALLATION
KEY
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- ALGORITHM CALIBRATION
LNRT MAG.
ing the kV knob.
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod-
PM_yld LNRT Energ Corr
(TIME RECIP. CORR.
ified or entered.
FAIL.)
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display E E
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in
a string being entered. Job Card IST 015
MAGNIFICATION CORRECTION
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in Job Card IST 013 CALIB PARAM
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc- TIME RECIPROCITY FAILURE fsc name
tions for the calibration in question before using these HEATER REFEN LNRT PARAM
menus).

LNRT PARAM display x=(3 values) MAGNIFICATION CALIB. Config:contact/magnify


HEATER CALIBRATION MAGNIF. PARAM display x=(2 values)
CHANGE CONFIG CALIB CALC
CALIB PARAM CALIB REF_ENERGY OF LNRT CHANGE
OD_ref SCALE MAS CALIB
LNRT PARAM change x=(value) MAGNIFICATION CALIB calc
NEXT VALID VALID
MAGNIF. PARAM change x=(value)
HEATER PARAM DISPLAY Kv=(3 values) I=(value) NEXT VALID
CHANGE
CONTACT CONFIGURATION
TIME RECIPROCITY FAILURE THICK.=x cm YES NO
HEATER PARAM MODIF Kv=(value) I=(value)
CALIB OD_mea CALC
NEXT VALID REF ENERGY PARAM DISPLAY OD_x=(7 values) MAGNIFICATION CALIB. x cm
CHANGE THICK CALIB
RECIPROCITY FAIL.:calc
TIME RECIPROCITY FAILURE
VALID
REF ENERGY PARAM MODIF OD_x=(value) Select plexi thickness MAGNIFICATION CALIB.
NEXT VALID 2 CM 4 CM 6 CM
MEASURED OPTICAL DENSITY=(value)
NEXT VALID

CALIB REF_ENERGY OF LNRT mAs=(value)


REF ENERGY PARAM DISPLAY mAs=(value) CALIB OD_mea CALC
REF ENERGY PARAM DISPLAY OD_r=(value)
CHANGE
CHANGE

CALIB REF. ENERGY calc


REF ENERGY PARAM MODIF OD_r=(value) REF ENERGY PARAM MODIF mAs=(value) VALID
CALIB REF_ENERGY OF LNRT
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID
MEASURED DENSITY OD=(value)
NEXT VALID

1–17
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

ARM
ILLUSTRATION 1–11
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (cont’d) A
INSTALLATION

KEY
Select arm/gene install
0004
INSTAL
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- GENE MEDICAL LANGUAGE ARM
ing the kV knob.
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod-
ified or entered. 0005
ARM ACCESS
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display VALID
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in THIS MENU CONSISTS OF PRODUCTION
TEST PROCEDURES THAT ARE OF NO USE
a string being entered. 5001 TO THE SERVICE ENGINEER.
GEMS-E (gen soft version) STA (release date)
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in INSTAL
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc-
5200
tions for the calibration in question before using these
menus). LAST CALIB (D/M/Y H:M) (date value) (time value) ROT. SENSOR PRESENCE
CKSUM TEST CALIB CONFIG ENDUR DMT YES NO

5210
5220 5230
CHECKSUM OF SAVED PARAM 5250
INSTALLATION TESTS ARM CONFIGURATION
ARM CALIBRATION
CHSUM CLEAR
STRENGTH CUTOFF TUBE COLLIM CASSET BUCKY CAMERA ANGLE
THICK COMP FORMAT GRID TUBE ANGLE
USING THE CLEAR FUNCTION
5211 WILL ENTAIL A COMPLETE RE– 09999
CALIBRATION OF THE
CHECKSUM DONE WARNING SENOGRAPHE DMR GANTRY. 5290 CAMERA FORMAT
6X6 8X8
5212
5221
BELT STRENGTH
5227
CALIB PARAM
G 5446
POWER CUTOFF TEST 18x24 / 24x30 HEIGHT DIFF.: NO
DEFAULT PARAMETERS
VALID Job Card IST 029 5310
VALID YES NO
TUBE HOUSING ANGULATION
5445
THIS MENU CONSISTS OF PRODUCTION
TEST PROCEDURES THAT ARE OF NO USE
TO THE SERVICE ENGINEER.
G H J K CALIB PARAM
CASSETTE DETECT PRESENCE
YES NO
5311 5232
HOUSING ANGULATION CALIB COLLIMATOR CONFIGURATION
EXPOSE MEASURE S.I.D Calcul FRONT_B TYPE MARG_L MARG_R MARG_F
5393 5314
Calib Exposure mAs: (value) HOUSING ANGULATION PARAM
+ – VALID A–REF
SAME MENU
STRUCTURE
AS MARG_L
5316
ARM INSTALLATION exposure
VALID 5312 5313 5315 Job Card IST 027 5302
TUBE ANGULAT. MEASURE mm (value) SOURCE IMAGE DISTANCE mm : (value) REFERENCE ANGLE (Rd) : (value) LATERAL COLL MARGIN (mm) : (value)
0006 + – VALID
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID NEXT VALID
ARM: ADJUST EXPOSURE
5447
COLLIMATOR TYPE:
V1 V2
V3 V4
5444
FRONT BLADE PRESENCE
0005
YES NO
ARM INSTALLATION exposure end
VALID installation steering step 13.–b.–iv 5231
TUBE HOUSING ANGULATION
YES NO

1–18
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

(ARM–INSTAL)
ILLUSTRATION 1–12
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (cont’d) CALIB
G

INSTALLATION
KEY
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- THICK COMP
ing the kV knob. 5250
ARM CALIBRATION
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod-
ified or entered. THICK COMP FORMAT GRID TUBE ANGLE

indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display 5251 5270
Job Card IST 025 Job Card IST 023 Job Card IST 030 5290
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in ’COMPRESSION ARM ROTATION
BREAST THICKNESS CALIB COMPRESSION CALIBRATION X–RAY FORMAT
a string being entered.
CONTACT MAGNIF FORCE LIMIT CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc-
tions for the calibration in question before using these ’COMP. ARM ROTATION PARAM
menus). MIN MAX CALCUL

J H K A
MIN ANGLE CALIB MAX ANGLE CALIB
* Job Card IST 024 (Value) (Value)
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID
5252 5257 5271
’CONTACT MODE’ THICKNESS ’MAGNIF MODE’ THICKNESS FORCE DETECTOR CALIB
CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM CALIB PARAM

5253 5258 5272 * 5172


’COMP. ARM ROTATION CALIB
CONTACT MODE THICK CALIB ’MAGNIF MODE’ THICK CALIB FORCE DETECTOR CALIB FORCE DETECTOR PARAMETERS
MIN MAX CALCUL
<5daN >15daN <5daN >15daN MEASURE CALCUL MEASURE CALCUL

5276
5254 5259 5273/5283 COMP MOTOR CURRENT LIMIT
CONTACT MODE THICK PARAM ’MAGNIF MODE’ THICK PARAM FORCE DETECTOR PARAMETERS CALIB PARAM
OFFSET ELASTIC 18x24 24x30 OFFSET ELASTIC 0daN 3daN. . . . . . . . . . . .27daN

5255 Not used for DMR 5277 5278


5281
’CONTACT THICK’ OFFSET = (value) BUCKY 24x30 THICK DELTA = (value) FORCE DETECTOR MEASURES COMPRESSION SAFETY CALIB COMP CURRENT LIMIT PARAM (value) %
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID 0daN 3daN 6daN 9daN 12daN 1>2 LIMIT_IC LIMIT_OC LIM_IC LIM_OC

5282
5279 5280
FORCE DETECTOR MEASURES
IN_COMPRESSION LIMIT % : (value) OUT OF COMP LIMIT % : (value)
5256 Not used for DMR 15daN 18daN 21daN 24daN 27daN 2>1
+ – VALID + – VALID
’CONTACT’ THICK ELASTIC = (value) BUCKY 18x24 THICK DELTA = (value)
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID

5260 5261 5274/5275


’MAGNIF’ THICK OFFSET = (value) MAGNIF THICK ELASTIC = (value) FORCE DETECTOR PARAMETERS (value)
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID NEXT VALID

1–19
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–13 (ARM–INSTAL)


INSTALLATIONMENU TREE STRUCTURE (cont’d)
INSTALLATION

KEY
H SET S10 TO 560 !

indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat-


X-RAY FORMAT (CALIB)
(values)
Job Card IST 030 5290
ing the kV knob.
X-RAY FORMAT
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod- CALIB PARAM
ified or entered.

indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display 5291


other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in X-RAY FORMAT CALIBRATION set SID to 560 !
a string being entered.

indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in


COLLIM LIGHT

Job Card IST 028


J
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc- 5309 5333
tions for the calibration in question before using these COLLIMATOR FORMAT CALIB LIGHT CENTRING CALIB set SID to 560 !
menus). DIFF–R EXPOSE ALIGN COVERAGE
EXPOSE REF_L REF_R REF_F DIFF–L

5335
MENU MENU LIGHT COVERAGE: (value in Motor Steps)
STRUC- STRUC- + – VALID
TURE TURE
IDENTICAL IDENTICAL
5392 5293
TOLATERAL
REF_RX–RAY FORMAT REF TO REF_R 5336
CALIB TRACK MOLY: mAs=(value)
+ – VALID MEASURE S.I.D Calcul LIGHT ALIGNMENT : (value in Motor Steps)
+ – VALID
5299
ARM INSTALLATION exposure 5295
VALID LATERAL REF MEASURE (mm) : (value)
NEXT VALID 5343
0006 CORR REAR FORMAT
ARM: ADJUST EXPOSURE
MEASURE S.I.D Calcul

5301
SOURCE IMAGE DISTANCE mm : (value) 5345
NEXT VALID SOURCE IMAGE DISTANCE mm=(value) 5338

NEXT VALID CALIB TRACK MOLY: mAs=(value)


0005 + – VALID
ARM INSTALLATION exposure end
5339
VALID 5344 ARM INSTALLATION exposure
REAR DIFF MEASURE mm=(value) VALID
NEXT VALID
0006
ARM: ADJUST EXPOSURE

5340

CORR LATERAL FORMAT


MEASURE S.I.D Calcul

5241 5342
SOURCE IMAGE DISTANCE mm : (value) 0005
LATERAL DIFF MEASURE mm=(value)
ARM INSTALLATION exposure end
VALID NEXT VALID
VALID

1–20
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–14
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (cont’d)

INSTALLATION
KEY
(ARM–INSTAL)
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- J
ing the kV knob.
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod-
ified or entered.
X-RAY FORMAT (PARAMS)
indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display Job Card IST 030 5290
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in X–RAY FORMAT REFERENCE set SID to 560 !
a string being entered. CALIB PARAM

indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in


order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc-
tions for the calibration in question before using these
H 5236
menus). X-RAY FORMAT PARAMETERS
Delta X COLLIM LIGHT

Job Card IST 036

5300 5305 5308


DIFFERENCE DELTA_X (mm): (value) COLLIMATOR PARAMETERS LIGHT CENT PARAMETERS
CO_L CO_R CO_F STP_L STP_R ALIGN COVERAGE
NEXT VALID

5297 5307 5349


LATERAL COLL OPENING (mm): (value) REAR COLL MOTOR STEP (mm): (value) LIGHT COVERAGE: (value in mm)
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID NEXT VALID

5298 5306 5344


REAR COLL OPENING (mm): (value) LAT COLL MOTOR STEP (mm): (value) LIGHT ALIGNMENT: (value in mm)
NEXT VALID NEXT VALID NEXT VALID

5135
FRONT COLL OPENING (mm): (value)
NEXT VALID

1–21
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

(ARM–INSTAL)
ILLUSTRATION 1–15
INSTALLATION MENU TREE STRUCTURE (cont’d) CALIB
K
INSTALLATION

KEY
(values) indicates that several values can be displayed by rotat- GRID
ing the kV knob. 5250
ARM CALIBRATION
(value) indicates that a single value is displayed or can be mod-
ified or entered. THICK COMP FORMAT GRID TUBE ANGLE

indicates that rotation of the kV knob will either display


Job Card IST 030 5290
other parameter values, or modify a digit or character in
X–RAY FORMAT
a string being entered.
CALIB PARAM
indicates that the 2nd trigger button must be pressed in
order to perform the calibration (see associated instruc-
tions for the calibration in question before using these
menus).

G J H A G
Job Card IST 026 5285
GRID TRAVEL
CALIB PARAM

5287
GRID PARAMETERS DISPLAY
OFFSET GAIN MIN MAX TESTS

ACCEL TPOSE SPEED SYNC DELTA TP_MAX

+1.000E+0
PARAM VMAX PARAM SYNC

+4000E+2 +2048E+3 +0000E+0

N_MIN N_MAX V_MIN V_MAX T_VLIN T_MIN T_MAX SLOPE T_SYNC0 DELTA TD_lim

+1200E+0 +3.300E+0 +5.000E+2 +1.500E+3 +9.00E+1 +7.000E+0 +1.200E+1 +1.964E–1 +8.000E–2 +2.800E+2 +2.500E+3

DEFAUT VALUES, GIVEN FOR INFORMATION ONLY. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CHANGE THESE PARAMETERS!

1–22
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

3–6 Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure

INSTALLATION
Once you have followed the installation mode access procedure given in Section 3–4, you
can go down into the various installation menus by selecting them progressively using the
six keys below the console display window (see Section 3–5).

To move upward in the tree structure, press the SETUP key once for each change of

level desired. This is useful for going from one branch of the tree structure to another during
installation procedures, or if you accidentally go into an unwanted branch.

3–7 Saved Parameters and Checksum

a. Parameters resulting from installation or non–proprietary maintenance procedures


are saved in two memory zones (one in the generator and one in the gantry) whose
contents are not lost when the DMR is switched off.
b. To perform a saved parameter memory checksum, go to the CKSUM menu for the
generator or gantry and run this function. You can now return to application mode
without receiving a checksum error message.
c. It is not mandatory to do a checksum each time you leave a menu. There is no risk
of losing data if you switch off the Senographe displaying checksum error from
generator (or gantry).
The only purpose of checksum error is to lock the application mode against any
random data change. When you perform the checksum you only tell the software
that you accept the data you have changed (that is, either data entered manually or
calibration data).

1–23
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

3–8 Re–loading of Default (Initial) Parameters


INSTALLATION

THE FUNCTIONS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION ARE NORMALLY NEV-


WARNING ER USED AFTER THE DMR HAS LEFT THE FACTORY.

To re–load the generator or gantry default parameters (prior to any installation or calibration
procedures), use the appropriate CLEAR menu. The use of this menu executes a software
power–up that is comparable to the very first hardware power–up of the generator or gantry.

When the generator CLEAR menu is used, the DMR leaves the installation menus and returns
to the application mode. In order to re–access the installation mode after performing a genera-
tor CLEAR, you must change the position of the installation menu enable switch (see Section
3–4).

When the gantry CLEAR menu is used, the DMR returns to the gantry installation entry level
(SETUP/ARM/VALID).

Following use of the CLEAR menu, the software displays a CHECKSUM ERROR message.
All generator or gantry calibration procedures must be performed, followed by a CKSUM
to enable use of the new parameters.

USE OF THE GENERATOR CLEAR MENU RESETS, FROM A SOFTWARE


WARNING POINT OF VIEW, THE THERMAL CONDITION OF CRITICAL COMPO-
NENTS (TUBE, TUBE HOUSING, GENERATOR, ETC.) TO A COLD CONDI-
TION. THIS MEANS THAT THE SOFTWARE THERMAL PROTECTIONS
CAN NO LONGER DETECT AN EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURE RISE IMME-
DIATELY FOLLOWING USE OF THIS MENU.

THE GENERATOR CLEAR MENU MUST THEREFORE BE USED WITH


CARE, ESPECIALLY WHEN OPERATIONS JUST PRIOR TO ITS USE HAVE
SIGNIFICANTLY RAISED CRITICAL COMPONENT TEMPERATURES (e.g.
NUMEROUS HIGH–POWER AND/OR LENGTHY EXPOSURES).

The existing parameters are PERMANENTLY LOST when a CLEAR menu is exe-
CAUTION cuted – a COMPLETE RE–CALIBRATION of the assembly (generator or gantry)
must therefore be performed.

1–24
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

3–9 Returning to the Application Mode

INSTALLATION
To return to the application mode press the SETUP key n times, where n is the number

of levels that you have gone down the installation tree structure.

Note: If you have performed any calibration procedures, or otherwise changed any saved pa-
rameter values, you must perform a saved parameter memory checksum before return-
ing to the application mode (see Section 3–7) – if you do not perform this checksum, then
you will receive a CHECKSUM ERROR message.

Note: If you switch off the DMR for any reason and then switch it on again, you must once
again change the position of the installation menu enable switch before being able to get
access to the installation mode (see Section 3–4).

3–10 Generator Configuration Parameters

3–10–1 Gantry Present/Absent (PRES_B)

Menu access path: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/PRES/PRES_B

The generator installation software provides access to a parameter called PRES_B (PRES-
ence_Arm), whose value can be set to either YES or NO. The value of PRES_B indicates,
from a generator software point of view, the presence or absence of the gantry, i.e. possibility
or not of communication with the gantry CPU.

The service engineer may set PRES_B to NO to isolate the generator from the gantry during
troubleshooting (from the point of view of the generator software, the gantry becomes a sim-
ple tube stand).

Following a generator CLEAR (see section 3–8) PRES_B takes on the value NO.

PRES_B is kept in the saved parameter memory, which means that its value is retained when
power is turned off. This means that if, during a service call, the service engineer has to set
PRES_B to NO it must be set back to YES before handing back the DMR to the customer.

The value of PRES_B can be set by following the menu access path shown above, selecting
YES or NO and performing a CKSUM.

1–25
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

3–10–2 Display of Parameters Following an Exposure


INSTALLATION

Menu access path: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/DISP

To simplify the service engineer’s work, the software can display certain parameters follow-
ing an exposure. These parameters are displayed on the console display window in two
groups which appear alternately:

kv mAs mA Time I heater

and

offset photo-cell photo-cell corrected thickness


HV measurement photo-cell
result measurement
result

Where:

offset = offset of photo-cell measurement (dark current + electrical offset)


photo-cell measurement result = photo-cell/mA measurement
corrected photo-cell measurement result = corrected according to DMR configuration
thickness = breast thickness in equivalent cm of plexiglass.

This DISP parameter is turned on and off by following the menu access path shown above.
Select YES or NO. A CKSUM is NOT necessary because this parameter is not a saved param-
eter. When power is turned off, the value of DISP is lost and reverts to NO at the next power–
up.

1–26
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

3–10–3 Calendar and Clock

INSTALLATION
Menu access path: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/DATE

The generator CPU is equipped with a calendar and clock that are used for the following func-
tions:

D Thermal protection cooling algorithms, whether or not the generator is turned on.
D Memorization of the date and time of an equipment failure.
D Last date of access to the installation mode.
The last function makes it possible for a service engineer to verify the date and time of the
last service visit and also determine whether access to the installation modes was made by
unauthorized persons since that visit.

The date is modified by following the menu access path shown above, selecting DATE, then

NEXT and, finally, rotating the kv dial to obtain the desired day. Select NEXT

again and rotate the kv dial to obtain the desired month. Repeat once more to obtain the de-
sired year, then select VALID to confirm the date.

Note: The date is entered in the form DD/MM/YY (for example, if the date to be entered is Feb-
ruary 14th, 2001, you must enter 14/02/01).

The time is modified by following the menu access path shown above and then selecting
HOUR. Enter the time of day as explained above for the date, using the NEXT, kv dial and
VALID functions.

Note: The time of day is entered in 24-hour format, therefore, if the time of day is 3:13:27 pm,
you must enter 15:13:27.

Note: Following a generator CLEAR of saved parameters, the calendar and clock, as well as
the last installation mode access date, are initialized to the release date of the generator
software version at 0:00:00.

3–10–4 Visual Representation of Numerical Parameters

When displayed on the console, most numerical values appear in the form of real numbers
in scientific notation floating point format with four significant figures.

Some examples are:

–1.250E+3 = –1250.00
+4.345E–1 = 0.4345
+1.000E+0 = 1.000

1–27
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

3–10–5 Visual Display of Parameter Values


INSTALLATION

A parameter value can be displayed on the DMR console by accessing the calibration menus
for the procedures that compute the parameter in question. Typically this is done when you
are at a menu choice between CALIB and PARAM. Select PARAM to display the parameter
value.

Note: If the calibration procedure computes more than one parameter, turning the kv

dial will display them one at a time in sequence.

As an example, looking at the values of scale factor K and offset voltage VOF of tube track
1 which are computed by the heater current scale factor calibration routine: follow the menu
access path SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/HTR_SCL/TRACK1/PARAM.

On the right of the first console display line appears the value of scale factor K. Rotate the
kv dial clockwise by one position. Now offset voltage VOF appears instead.

CAUTION DO NOT attempt to modify these calibrated parameter values.

3–10–6 Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement

Parameters are entered or modified in scientific notation form.

When at the parameter value modification or measurement entry level in the menu structure,
there are two possible selections: NEXT and VALID. Begin by selecting NEXT. This enables
modification of the first character to be entered. Successive selections of NEXT will enable
modification of each character to be entered.

Use the kv dial to modify the character being entered. Select VALID when all

characters are correctly entered.

NEVER modify a parameter value on a DMR that has already been calibrated un-
CAUTION less you have a specific reason. Doing so, in general, will necessitate entering the de-
fault parameter value(s) and completely re–calibrating the sub–assembly
(generator or gantry) for the parameter value(s) in question.

1–28
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

As an example, set the maximum exposure time to 5.7 (+5.700E+0) seconds, follow the menu
access path SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/T_MAX, select NEXT

INSTALLATION
and turn the kv dial to set the sign of the value to be entered (in this example,

the value is positive +). Select ”NEXT again. Turn the kv dial to set the value of the first digit
to 5. Continue selecting NEXT and turning the kv dial until you have input +5.700E+0 (man-
tissa sign and four digits plus exponent sign and one digit). If you make a mistake, select
NEXT repeatedly until you arrive at the faulty value, then correct it by rotating the kV dial.
If you truly wish to enter the parameter value, select VALID, keeping the above CAUTION
in mind before doing so! To exit the modification routine, press SETUP once.

Note: Pressing the VALID key is effective ONLY when the entire value, including exponent,
is displayed. This means that if you correct a digit after making a mistake, as described
above, you must press the NEXT key repeatedly until the entire parameter value is vis-
ible before being able to enter the new value using the VALID key.

3–10–7 Entry of an Alpha–Numeric Value

This is the case when entering screen pair names (seven characters maximum allowed).

The principle is identical to that used for parameter value entry as described in Section

3–10–6 (repeated use of NEXT, kv dial and VALID).

Here, rotation of the kv dial gives access to the following characters:

The 26 letters of the alphabet

The ten digits from 0 to 9

The colon :

The choice of a screen pair name is confirmed by pressing VALID.

1–29
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

3–11 Principles of Generator Calibration


INSTALLATION

3–11–1 Vocabulary

The following key words are found throughout the generator installation menus:

CALIB designates a menu that steers you to the calibration procedure itself.

PARAM designates a menu that steers you to other menus that allow you to display and
modify parameters.

CHANGE designates a menu that allows you to modify a parameter.

REF designates a menu within a calibration procedure that allows you to modify the com-
mand input (mAs for reference energy, photo-cell HV for the frequency/HV calibration, heat-
er current for the heater current scale factor calibration, etc...).

CALCUL designates a menu that steers you to the execution of the computations necessary
to obtain the parameter values.

3–11–2 Use of the First Trigger/Second Trigger Buttons During Generator Installation

In general, calibration computations are started by pressing the SECOND TRIGGER button
(the FIRST TRIGGER button is not used during installation).

After going down through the different menus, the final CALIB selection steers you to a
menu that has no second line displayed on the console display window (i.e. there are no more
menus to select). It is at this level that the calibration computation is started by pressing the
SECOND TRIGGER button.

This general rule does not apply, for practical reasons, when measurements on the gantry
are necessary (because the gantry and generator/console may be physically separated, the ser-
vice engineer cannot necessarily be near both at the same time). For example:

– Calibration of photo-cell HV measurement. The command input is sent upon selection


of the START key and is removed upon selection of the STOP key. For this calibration
procedure, the service engineer has to measure the photo-cell HV on the photo-cell
board, which is attached to the gantry, and enter the result via the HV_M menu.

– HV/DAC calibration. The computation is started upon selection of the START key and
stops automatically. A message appears on the console display to indicate the end of
the computation.

3–11–3 Inhibit Conditions Due to Gantry Absence

The AOP calibration procedures (CELL and ALGO) need to exchange information with the
gantry CPU.

Therefore, before performing these calibration procedures, it is necessary to set the value of
PRS_A to YES (see Section 3–10–1) otherwise, error messages indicating software absence
of the gantry will appear on the console display and access to the CALIB menus is inhibited
(only display and modification of parameters will be possible).

1–30
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

3–11–4 Inhibit Conditions Due to Grid Absence/Presence

INSTALLATION
Many of the AEC calibration procedures are performed with grid and without grid. For such
procedures, the gantry CPU indicates to the generator CPU whether or not the grid is present.
The calibration software will verify agreement between physical presence/absence of the
grid and the service engineer’s choice of calibration with grid or without grid. If there is dis-
agreement, error messages will appear and access to the CALIB menu will be inhibited.

3–11–5 Displayed Messages During Exposure–Producing Calibration Procedures

The following messages are displayed in the upper right–hand corner of the console display
during calibration procedures that make X–ray exposures:

Exposure number (when exposure is valid)


Arcing
Failure (return to application mode for explicit message)
Excessive temperature
End of series of exposures
Certain calibration procedures that make X–ray exposures insert, in alternation with the
above messages, specific messages such as:

Too much plexi


Not enough plexi
Reduce HV, same point

3–11–6 Other Displayed Messages

In general the software displays, as much as possible, messages indicating the phases of cal-
ibration such as:

Calibration end
Calcul done

SECTION 4
SITE PREPARATION

See the Pre-installation Manual for information on site preparation.

1–31
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SECTION 5
INSTALLATION STEERING
INSTALLATION

The installation of the DMR must be performed according to the CONTENT as


CAUTION well as the CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER given in this section. Failure to do so can
result in faulty calibration of the product and subsequent loss of performance.

Note: Use the installation flow chart (illustration 1–16) as a memo to assist you during the
installation.
Use calibration form (IST 043) to record all values obtained.

1. Unpack generator, gantry and accessories. See Job Card IST 008 UNPACKING THE
EQUIPMENT.
2. Physically place/anchor gantry, generator, console, protective glass screen, pedals, etc.
(see Job Card IST 009 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION).
3. Attach appropriate regulatory and safety labelling to the equipment according to local
regulations (see Job Card IST 038 REGULATORY AND SAFETY LABELLING).

The attachment of appropriate regulatory and safety labelling to the equipment is


CAUTION a LEGAL REQUIREMENT for operation of an X–ray producing unit.

4. Remove all side covers and trim panels from generator and gantry (see Job Card IST
032 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE COVERS AND TRIM PANELS).
5. Inspect inside of generator and gantry for loose or disconnected cables, wires, connec-
tors, etc. Refer to MIS maps if necessary.
6. Connect cables between generator, console, and gantry and check the vent screw on the
HV tank(see Job Card IST 010).
7. Connect mains supply to generator and configure generator for mains voltage, frequen-
cy and number of phases (see Job Card IST 011 ”CONNECTION OF MAINS SUP-
PLY).

Do not attempt to turn on the DMR at this point. Continue following the Installa-
CAUTION tion Steering in the chronological order provided.

8. Measure mains line resistance and determine maximum allowable generator power (see
Job Card IST 012 LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT).
Note: If a high-power installation (50 kW or more) is known to exist on the same mains circuit
as the DMR being installed, it is not necessary to measure line resistance. In this case,
set maximum generator power to 5.0 kW (maximum possible value) when you reach
step 13.–a.–ii below. DO NOT SET MAXIMUM GENERATOR POWER NOW. FOL-
LOW THE CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER OF THE INSTALLATION STEERING.

1–32
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

9. Check basic supply voltages (see Job Card IST 022 CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY
VOLTAGES).

INSTALLATION
DO NOT ACCESS THE INSTALLATION SETUP MENUS DURING THIS
WARNING CHECK. FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE IN THE ORDER GIVEN. DO NOT
PERFORM ANY CHECKSUM OPERATIONS. EXTREMELY IMPORTANT
INFORMATION ABOUT THE INTEGRITY OF THE DMR RAM CONTENTS
CAN BE PERMANENTLY LOST IF THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT FOL-
LOWED CORRECTLY.

10. Check jumpers and switches (see Job Card IST 037 JUMPERS AND SWITCHES).

11. Measure free space between floor and ceiling of the room.
If the available height is less than 2.5 meters (about 8.2 feet), perform job card IST 40
Setting of elevator upper travel limit.
12. Perform the initial power–up check.

VERY IMPORTANT –– READ CAREFULLY:


WARNING
DO NOT ACCESS THE INSTALLATION SETUP MENUS UNTIL THE IN-
STRUCTIONS INDICATE TO DO SO. FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE IN THE
ORDER GIVEN. DO NOT PERFORM ANY CHECKSUM OPERATIONS. EX-
TREMELY IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THE INTEGRITY OF THE
DMR RAM CONTENTS CAN BE PERMANENTLY LOST IF THESE IN-
STRUCTIONS ARE NOT FOLLOWED CORRECTLY.

a. Turn on the DMR and wait for the autotests to execute.


b. Normally, the DMR will now be in application mode, in the exposure mode and
configuration that it was in when last turned off before leaving the factory.

THERE SHOULD NOT BE, IN ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, A CHECKSUM ER-


WARNING ROR MESSAGE ON THE CONSOLE (i.e. Checksum error (gen) AND/OR Arm
checksum error).

IF EITHER OR BOTH OF THESE MESSAGES APPEARS, COMPLETE THIS


INITIAL POWER–UP CHECK AND RELOAD THE GENERATOR OR ARM
(OR BOTH) SAVED PARAMETERS USING THE DISKETTE (PN° 2152250)
DELIVERED IN THE ACCESSORIES KIT. THIS DISKETTE IS LABELLED
WITH THE SAME PRODUCT LOCATOR NUMBER AS YOUR DMR. FILES
ARE IDENTIFIED GXXXX.DAT (GENERATOR) AND AXXXX.DAT (ARM),
XXXX BEING THE FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER. THERE SHOULD NOT BE
ANY CHECKSUM ERROR IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE CORRECT RE-
LOADING OF THESE PARAMETERS.

c. Change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1–8 on gener-
ator CPU board 400–PL3, see section 3–4).

1–33
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

d. Starting from application mode, select :


SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/DATE on the console.
INSTALLATION

e. If necessary, enter the correct date and hour.


13. Perform software configuration.
a. Perform generator software configuration.
Before beginning:

Turn on the DMR.

Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu en-
able switch (switch B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3, see section 3–4).

i. Choose console dialog display language:


Starting from application mode, select SETUP/LANGUAGE/language on the
console, where language is the desired console dialogue display language
(FRANC, ENGL, DEUTS, ESPAN, ITALI or PORTU).

Note: For compatibility with the information contained in this manual concerning menu paths,
select ENGL for installation of the DMR. When installation is complete, the language
will be changed to that of the country of installation.

ii. Set maximum generator output power.


Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CONFIG/PMAX/pmax
on the console, where pmax is the maximum generator power determined from
the line resistance measurement performed in step 8. above. Possible values are
3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, and 5.0 kW.

Note: The default (and maximum possible) value is 5.0 kW.

iii. Set maximum X–ray tube mAs.


Select SETUP/MASMAX on the console. Enter the maximum mAs value ac-
cording to local regulations using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the
kV dial. See sections 3–10–5 and 3–10–6.

Note: The default (and maximum possible) value is +6.000E+2 (600) mAs.

iv. Set maximum X–ray exposure time.


Select SETUP/T_MAX on the console. Enter the maximum X–ray exposure
time according to local regulations using the NEXT and VALID keys and ro-
tating the kV dial. See sections 3–10–5 and 3–10–6.

Note: The default (and maximum possible) value is +2.000E+1 (20) seconds.

v. Check X–ray tube (model, focus, number of anode metals and anode angles)
type configuration:

1–34
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

Select SETUP/ GENE/ INSTAL/ GENE/ CONFIG/ CONFIG/TUBE/


MODEL/XXXX. Check the type of tube installed or to be installed and set

INSTALLATION
the corresponding value:
GS412: for DMR V1 and V2
70TH–F: for DMR+ and V1 or V2 upgraded with Software V6.21 and DMR+
tube
70TH–D: only SENO 2000D

If the configuration is correct, skip directly to step vii below. Otherwise, con-
tinue with step vi.

vi. Check X–ray tube type configuration:


Select SETUP/FOCUS/DUAL on the console.

Select SETUP/ANODE/DM on the console.

Select SETUP on the console, then verify that the console display now shows
the correct tube type as specified in step v above.

vii. Check AOP type configuration. Starting from step v above, select: SETUP/
SETUP/SETUP/AOP/FILM/TYPE
Check that Status shown is: A.
The following information on the choice of AOP type should be transmitted
to the physician. Three types are available:

Type A is AOP 4.01, as installed by default on DMR+ and DMR V2. It imple-
ments new AOP tables, with variable composition.
Type B is AOP 4.01, without variable composition. It is not widely used.
Type C is AOP 3.01, as installed on DMR V1. (no variable composition).

Recommended choice:
If there is already a DMR on site, select the same configuration.
If you have free choice, select AOP 4.01 with variable composition (type A).
If the physician requires it, select AOP 3.01 (type C)

b. Perform gantry software configuration.


i. Check the cassette detection presence configuration.
Starting from application mode select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/
CONFIG/CASSET/(YES or NO)
– Enter NO for DMR V1
– Enter YES for DMR V2 and DMR+

ii. Check the correct configuration of the 18x24 bucky.


Starting from application mode select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/
CONFIG/BUCKY/18X24/24X30 Height diff.:YES/NO

– Enter NO when buckies 18x24 have the same thickness than the bucky
24x30 (Standard choice for DMR V1 and DMR+),
– Enter YES when buckies 18x24 are more higher than the bucky 24x30
(Standard choice for DMR V2).

1–35
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

iii. Check the correct configuration of GRID acceleration.


Starting from application mode select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/
INSTALLATION

CALIB/GRID/PARAMS/TESTS/ACCEL
– Set ACCEL parameter to 1 (1.000E+0) for DMR+.
– Set ACCEL parameter to 1 (4.000E+0) for DMR V1_P and V2_P.
iv. Set X–ray tube housing configuration.
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/
CONFIG/TUBE/YES on the console (the X–ray tube housing is inclinable
on all DMRs).
Perform a gantry CKSUM and return to application mode. Check that NONE
of the following error messages appears on the console display:

S53 105/080 (incompatible housing configuration)

S53 105/081 (incompatible housing configuration)

S54 155/082 (incompatible tube type)

S54 155/083 (incompatible tube type)

v. Check label on collimator for type (V1 to V4).


Starting from application mode select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/
CONFIG/COLLIM/TYPE
vi. Check the collimator front blade presence.
Starting from application mode select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/
CONFIG/COLLIM/FRONT_B/YES or NO
In standard configuration, DMR V1 hardware has not a motorized Front
Blade.
The default setting is YES (collimator with front blade control).

vii. Set lateral margin of X–ray beam. Access the arm configuration menu. Start-
ing from application mode, select:
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM/MARG_L
Then use +/– keys to set margin at desired value and select VALID.
See the table below for standards and recommendations to get full film black-
ening.

Standard Lateral margin (mm) Selection *


CEI** +2 ...
UK +3 ...
AUSTRALIA** 0 ...
MQSA / CDRH +2 ...
* Note down (X) the selected value.
** Standard authorizes the full film blackening and in these tables, we indicate the
margin configuration to get it. But the user can also use margins inside the film.

1–36
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

viii. Set rear margin of X–ray beam. Select:


SETUP/MARG_R

INSTALLATION
Then use +/– keys to set margin at desired value and select VALID.
See the table below for standards and recommendations to get full film black-
ening.

Standard Rear margin (mm) Selection *


CEI** +2 ...
UK +2 ...
AUSTRALIA** 0 ...
MQSA +2 ...
* Note down (X) the selected value.
** Standard authorizes the full film blackening and in these tables, we indicate the
margin configuration to get it. But the user can also use margins inside the film.

ix. Set front margin of X–ray beam. Select:


SETUP/MARG_F
Then use +/– keys to set margin at desired value and select VALID.
See the table below for standards and recommendations to get full film black-
ening.

Standard Front margin (mm) Selection *


CEI +2 ...
UK +2 ...
AUSTRALIA +3 ...
MQSA +2 ...
* Note down (X) the selected value.
Note: The MQSA default is factory set for full film blackening.

Note: For DMR V1 (in standard configuration) the adjustment of the Front Blade is manual
(the menu SETUP/MARG_F is not accessible).
For DMR V1 upgraded system with collimator V3 kit, the menu SETUP/MARG_F is
available.

x. Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode


xi. Set gantry medical parameters.
Ask the doctor for the desired paddle compression speed (fast or slow). Start-
ing from application mode, select SETUP/MEDICAL/SPEED on the con-
sole. Select FAST or SLOW on the console.

Ask the doctor for the desired maximum compression force in daN. Select
SETUP/FORCE on the console. Select + or – on the console repeatedly until
the desired force value is reached (possible values range from 4 to 20 daN in
steps of 1 daN). Once the desired value is reached, select VAL on the console
to confirm the desired value.
Note: The ACR recommendation is 18daN (40lbs).

1–37
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

Ask the doctor if automatic decompression (i.e. return of the compression


paddle to its home position) following an exposure is desired. Select SETUP/
INSTALLATION

DECOMP on the console. Select YES on the console if automatic decom-


pression is desired, or NO if it is not desired.

Ask the doctor if a beep tone is desired. Select SETUP/BEEP on the console.
Select YES on the console if a beep tone is desired, or NO if it is not desired.

Ask the doctor for the desired maximum height during automatic decompres-
sion (between 10 and 40 cm). Select SETUP/HEIGHT on the console.
Select + or – on the console repeatedly until the desired height value is
reached. Then select VALID to confirm the value.

Ask the doctor for the desired cassette detection mode (default is “YES”).
Select SETUP/FILM on the console. Select “NO” ONLY if no cassette
detection is desired.

Note: The parameter film is reset to yes at each power up of the DMR.
The service engineer is not needed for selecting the above–mentioned gantry medical
parameters (SPEED, FORCE, DECOMP, BEEP, HEIGHT and FILM); the doctor can
easily change them at will at any time following installation of the DMR.

xii. Set paddle deformation parameters.


See Job card IST044 “Setting paddle deformation parameters”.

14. Perform preliminary generator and gantry testing.


See Job Card IST 033 PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY TESTING.
15. Calibrate grid position.
See Job Card IST 026 CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION.
16. Check safe–lighting and film processing (see Job Card IST 034 CHECKING SAFE–
LIGHTING AND FILM PROCESSING).
Note 1 : For following steps :
use AEC flow chart to assist in following steering guide, see illustration 1–17.

Note 2 : In case of error messages during the following steps, see IST 41 for explanation of these
messages.

17. Calibrate photo-cell HV measurement and scale factor.


See Job Card IST 004 CALIBRATION OF photo-cell HV MEASUREMENT AND
SCALE FACTOR.
18. Calibrate photo-cell sensitivity as a function of its voltage.
See Job Card IST 005 CALIBRATION OF photo-cell SENSITIVITY AS A FUNC-
TION OF ITS VOLTAGE.

Note: It is a good practice to backup generator data at this time.

19. Calibrate AEC for each screen pair (repeat steps a. to j. below for each screen pair).

1–38
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

a. Choose and configure a screen pair.


Perform the procedures in Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND

INSTALLATION
CONFIGURATION.

b. Check on pre–exposure in Jobcard IST046.


c. Calibrate photo-cell gain.
Perform the calibration in Job Card IST 007 CALIBRATION OF photo-cell GAIN
FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR.

d. Determine if reciprocity law failure compensation parameters (LNRT) can be en-


tered manually. If not, perform the necessary calibration to determine them.
IF the screen and film of the screen pair being calibrated appear in table Table 1
below, or IF, in your own experience installing the DMR, you have ALREADY
determined parameters A0, A1 and A2 for the SAME screen pair, go directly to
step e..
IF this is not the case, go directly to Job Card IST 013 CALIBRATION OF FILM
RECIPROCITY FAILURE COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR.
Once this calibration is finished, write down the newly–determined parameters
A0, A1 and A2 for the screen pair being calibrated in table Table 1 below, then
SKIP step e. and go DIRECTLY to step f.

Table 1 – a0, a1 and a2 values for various screen pairs

PROCESSOR
SCREEN BRAND AND CYCLE TIME
TYPE FILM BRAND AND TYPE (SEC) A0 A1 A2
KODAK MIN–R KODAK MIN–R MA 90 +1.000E+0 +1.329E–1 +1.333E–2
” ” ” KODAK MIN–R E 90 +1.000E+0 +9.797E–2 +1.124E–2
” ” ” KODAK MIN–R H 90 +1.000E+0 +1.432E–1 +1.880E–2
” ” ” KODAK MIN–R M 90 +1.000E+0 +1.698E–1 +2.469E–2
” ” ” KODAK MIN–R 2000 90 +1.000E+0 +1.219E–1 +1.491E–2
” ” ” 3M TRIMAX HM 90 +1.000E+0 +8.479E–2 +1.210E–2
AGFA MR detail S AGFA MR5 150 +1.000E+0 +1.491E–1 +1.796E–2
” ” ” MR3–II 120 +1.000E+0 +1.170E–1 +9.586E–3

KODAK MIN–R 2000/2190 MIN–R 2000 90 +1.000E+0 +1.219E–1 +1.491E–2


AGFA HD/HD–S AGFA HDR–C 90 +1.000E+0 +7.686E–2 +6.342E–3
FUJI AD FUJI ADM 90 +1.000E+0 +1.576E–1 +1.988E–2

e. Calibrate reference energy.

1–39
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

Enter manually the three reciprocity law failure compensation parameters (A0, A1
and A2) either from table Table 1 or from your own notes from a previous installa-
INSTALLATION

tion of the same screen pair on another DMR for the screen and film of the screen
pair being calibrated:

Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/


ALGO/FSC=x/CALIB/LNRT/PARAM on the console, where x is the screen
pair indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated. See
Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION.
At this point, enter the three parameter values by using the CHANGE key, rotating
the kV dial and using the NEXT, VALID and SETUP keys. See sections 3–10–5
and 3–10–6.
If this is an additional DMR, at the same site, using the same processor, then as soon
as the three parameter values are correctly entered, go IMMEDIATELY to Job
Card IST 014 CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR A GIVEN
SCREEN PAIR. Once this calibration is finished, go directly to step f. below.
Otherwise, go directly to Job Card IST 013 CALIBRATION OF FILM REC-
IPROCITY FAILURE COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR. Once
this calibration is finished, write down the newly–determined parameters A0, A1
and A2 for the screen pair being calibrated in table 1.
f. AOP strategy: this parameter is determined automatically at the end of IST013 or
IST014 reference energy calibration. So the manual setting of the AOP strategy
(IST039) is no longer necessary.
Note: However, if there are several senographe DMR installed on the same site, it may be nec-
essary to “equalize” all the strategies to the same value, to avoid unjustified mAs devi-
ation between identical senographes. For this purpose only, it is still possible to read/set
the strategy value. Starting from application mode, select:
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/ALGO/FSC=x/STRAT
Where x is the screen pair indicator (A, B, C, D, or E).
See IST039 for further reference.
This equalization must only be done if the DMRs are using the same film/screen couple,
same film processor, same SID.

g. Optical density optimization, see Job Card IST 050, IST 051.

h. Calibrate photo-cell in Stereotix 2 positions.

Note: This step is not applicable for non–Stereotix 2 installations.

Perform the calibration in Job Card IST 018 CALIBRATION OF photo-cell IN


STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS.

i. Calibrate reference energy in Stereotix 2 mode.

Note: This step is not applicable for non–Stereotix 2 installations.

Perform the calibration in Job Card IST 019 CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE


ENERGY IN STEREOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR.

1–40
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

j. If the AEC calibration for the screen pair being calibrated is successful and com-
plete at this point (which is normally the case) be sure that this screen pair is en-

INSTALLATION
abled for use in application mode (see Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR
SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION.
20. Test for absence of grid lines on exposed film.
See Job Card IST 031 TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON EXPOSED FILM.

21. Change console dialog display language to that of the country of installation (if other
than English):
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/MEDICAL/LANGUAGE/
language on the console, where language is the desired console dialog display lan-
guage (FRANC, ENGL, DEUTS, ESPAN, ITALI or PORTU).

22. At this step, a calibration backup can be done. Then, in case of a system crash, the cal-
ibration backup can be used or the system can be completely recalibrated following the
process in chapter 2.
23. Perform safety checks (collimator size for example) if applicable from local regula-
tions.
24. Applicable to countries subject to MQSA requirements only (US and Canada for exam-
ple):
MQSA requirement 900.12(e)(5)(vii)(C) deals with paddle length extension: the
paddle chest wall edge shall not extend by more than 1% the chest wall edge border of
the film. To test if delivered paddles are compliant with this rule, use the FMI kits
shipped with the system.

Kits contain appropriate test instructions. In case paddles are found non–compliant, kits
also contain a set of adjusting wedges for correction.

Use one kit per paddle.

FMI 11468 (p/n 2308834) is to be used to test (and potentially modify) the following
paddles:
Paddle No. Designation
2233355–2 18x24 paddle
2233355–3 18x24 paddle with a notch (Crystal)
36002738 Biopsy paddle
2102380 Round spot paddle
2148861 Axillary compression paddle

FMI 11485 (p/n 2337272) is to be used to test (and potentially modify) the following
paddle (ALREADY INCLUDED IN THE FMI KIT ITSELF):
Paddle No. Designation
2244710–3 MQSA 24x30 paddle

25. Switch off the DMR to disable access to installation menus.


26. Connect room lights (optional), see Job card IST042 for Senographe DMR+ and
DMR V2+. For DMR V1 consult Job Card IST010.
27. Refit all covers.

1–41
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–16
DMR STEERING GUIDE FLOWCHART
INSTALLATION

Note: use Calibration form (IST043) to record all obtained values

Do software configuration
* of medical menus:
Unpacking the equipment ...... Language
Compression speed
IST 008 Compression max. force ......
Decomp. auto
Beep
Physical installation Film detection
......
IST 009
Do/check software configuration
Regulatory and Safety of install menus:
Labelling ...... Generator: Pmax
IST 038 MaSMax
T. Max
Removal of side covers AOP type
IST 032 ...... Tube type ......
& general inspection Gantry:Cassette detection
Bucky settings
Tube housing
Connecting the cables + ...... Collimator settings
HV tank check IST 010 Paddle deformation settings (IST 044)

Arm Angle Check


* Check box Connection of Mains supply ...... IST 015 (Check only) ......
when step done Only for DMR+
IST 011
Preliminary generator
Line resistance measurement & gantry testing ......
......
IST 033
IST 012

First power–on for basic Check calibration of


...... grid position ......
power supplies check
IST 026
IST 022
Check safe lighting
Check jumpers & switches ...... & film processing ......
IST 037 IST 034

AEC calibration
Set elevator upper travel limit ......
...... (see AEC flow chart, illus. 1–17)
IST 040 (optionnal)
Test for no grid lines ......
Power–on: IST 031
observe for possible ......
error codes
Clear generator & gantry error stacks
Clear generator statistics ......
Backup generator & gantry parameters

Perform safety regulation checks ......


(optional)
Checksum
error
codes MQSA paddle adjustments ......
NO (US and Canada only)
displayed
?
Switch off to disable access ......
to install menus
YES
Wire room lamps/door (IST042 or IST010 ......
for DMR V1+) and refit all covers
Restore factory data if possible, or
recalibrate the complete system
following the calibration process
shown in Chapter 2 – Calibration

1–42
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

ILLUSTRATION 1–17
FLOW CHART OF AEC/AOP CALIBRATION

INSTALLATION
DMR : FLOW CHART OF AEC/AOP CALIBRATION
CAUTION: ONE NEED
DO NOT PERFORM IST 017 FILM/SCREEN ONLY
COUPLE
AT FIRST INSTALLATION ? ALREADY ? YES
? TO SHIFT
AVERAGE
? NO
CALIBRATED? DENSITY

NO YES
CHECK OF VIEWBOX
& SENSITOMETRIC
STABILTY IST 047 & IST 048
A
DIFFERENT
? SCREEN
?
kV SCALE FACTOR IST 017
COMMON YES
TO HV_PM INTERNAL COUPLE CHOICE NO
ALL VOLTMETER IST 004 (NAME, VALIDATION)
CALIBRATION parag.5
COUPLES IST 006
Time : 20’ DAC IST 004 Time : 5’
COUPLE CHOICE
CALIBRATION parag.6 (NAME, VALIDATION
IST 006
PM/HV_PM
PARAMETERS DUPLICATION Time : 5’
CALIBRATION Copy only parameters without
IST 005
screen
PARAMETERS
COUPLE COUPLE CHOICE IST 007 section 8 step 1 to 5
DUPLICATION IST 007
(NAME, VALIDATION Time : 5’ section 8
IST 006 steps 1
Time : 5’ PM YIELD See Note 1 below to 10
PM YIELD IST 007 Perform only calibration Time : 5’
See Note 2 with screen
IST 007 parag. 6.5, 6.6, 6.7, 6.10
Time : 40’ and 6.11
kV RISE TIME IST 046 Time : 20’
A
LNRT
PARAMS
? ALREADY
? NO
YES SEE RECOMMENDATION # 1
KNOWN COUPLE CHOICE
HEATER
ENTER KNOWN CALIBRATION AT 30 mA
PARAMETERS
(A0, A1, A2) IST 013/5.5 Time : 5’
from steering Time : 10’
guide table SEE RECOMMENDATION # 2
REFERENCE ENERGY
path = AOP/ALGO/FSC = x..
/CALIB/LNRT.. REFERENCE ENERGY IST 014
/PARAM/CHANGE IST 013/5.6 Time : 20’
Time : 5’ Time : 25’
LNRT OD OPTIMIZATION
REFERENCE ENERGY SEE RECOMMENDATION # 3 Contact mode
IST 050
IST 014 IST 013/5.7 Time : 30’ to 90’
Time : 20’ Time : 45’ to 80’ OD OPTIMIZATION
Mag. mode IST 051
AOP STRATEGY
Automatic
Time :0’ (See installation REFERENCE
section 5, parag.19.F) ENERGY
FOR STEREOTIX
(IF APPLICABLE)
OD OPTIMIZATION
Time : 30’ to 90’ Contact mode IST 050
IST 019
Time : 20’
OD OPTIMIZATION OPTIONAL (If required by local regulation)
Mag. mode IST 051 (e.g.: MQSA 2002)
END

STEREOTIX NOTE 1
? TO BE ? DO NOT FORGET : DO BOTH COPY
CALIBRATED YES
STEREOTIX CELL E.G. : A no screen TO B no screen
CALIBRATION IST 018 AND
NO Time : 15’ A with screen TO B with screen
REFERENCE ENERGY
FOR STEREOTIX IST 019
NOTE 2
Time : 20’
IF LNRT PARAMS ARE UNKNOWN
PERFORM IST 13 IMMEDIATELY
CALIBRATE AFTER IST 07 (SO, WITH HOT TUBE)
END ? ANOTHER ?
NO YES
COUPLE
Time (in minutes) is an average value for indication purpose only

1–43
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100
INSTALLATION

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR AEC/AOP CALIBRATION PROCEDURE

Recommendation # 1: Selection of Reference O.D.

Whenever Reference O.D. is determined by the customer, take in account the following:
• Site dedicated to cancer screening campaign. See applicable standards,

• Kodak MinR 2000; recommended net O.D. > 1.4.

• The value must be compatible with the quality of the viewboxes.

To perform IST 013, it is possible to use an O.D. value other than the one expected by the doctor.
• In this case, once IST 013 has been performed, O.D. value must be adjusted with IST 014,
• This O.D. (used to complete IST 013) needs to be chosen on the linear part of the sensitometric curve with the
recommended gamma (See Job Card IST 048). Film Reciprocity Law Failure Compensation algorithm of DMR
uses a calculation range around O.D. ± 0.2.
Note: Take care to have OD ± 0.2 range inside the same linear part (i.e. with the same slope).

Recommendation # 2: Setting of Sensitometric Scale from Senographe Console

– Enter Sensitometric Scale (steps 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15),

Note: The target O.D. is between two density steps. Use these two values to calculate the gamma value:

Gamma = (D(n+1) – D(n))/0.3. The DMR will do the calculation this way.

The result shall be identical or very close to the value found with Job card IST 048.

If not, modify the choice of O.D. steps, by shifting the step values.

Recommendation # 3: Calibration of Film Reciprocity Law Failure Compensation for a given


Screen/Film pair

– Calibrate the Reference Energy (step 5.6 of Job Card IST 013).
• Choose O.D. according to the recommendation # 1.

• For a good result, it is recommended to find manually the exact mAs value to reach the expected O.D.
with 28 kV/4 cm acrylic.

– Perform Film Reciprocity Law failure Compensation procedure: step 5.7 of IST 013.

– CAUTION: If an error 068/xxx is displayed by the Senographe console, it means that the parameters may be
erroneous. Do not attempt to force the calibration. Reset the generator and perform again the calibration.

• Check result according to step 5.9 of IST 013:

The optical density must not vary by more than 0.2 between any of the three films; if it does, the entire
calibration must be repeated.

1–44
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

• If the O.D. used in IST 013 is different from O.D. desired by customer, perform IST 014 : Calibration of
the REFERENCE ENERGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN/FILM PAIR.

INSTALLATION
Note: Check IST 039. Verify if the strategy computed by DMR is compatible with kV and
mAs values:
– If you decrease the strategy, e.g., Very Fast to Fast, for a same AOP mode configu-
ration, the choice of kV will be higher.

1–45
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

Blank page
INSTALLATION

1–46
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHAPTER 2 – CALIBRATION

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION

This chapter is a resume of the procedures to follow when a complete re–calibration of the
generator and/or gantry is deemed necessary, when a new screen pair is being introduced,
when the Stereotix 2 option is being installed after the initial installation, and when the cus-
tomer wishes to change the reference optical density in AEC and AOP modes.

CALIBRATION
This chapter is divided into 7 sections:

D Section 1 introduces the chapter.


D Section 2 describes generator calibration (except AEC calibration of a screen pair).
D Section 3 provides information for complete gantry calibration.
D Section 4 provides information for AEC calibration for a given screen pair.
D Section 5 describes AEC calibration of a Stereotix 2 installed after initial installation.
D Section 6 describes re–calibration of non–Stereotix 2 reference optical density in AEC
and AOP modes.
D Section 7 describes re-calibration of Stereotix 2 mode reference optical density in AEC
mode.

SECTION 2
GENERATOR CALIBRATION

1. Check jumpers and switches – see Job Card IST 037.


2. Calibrate X–ray tube heater current scale factor – see Job Card IST 001.
3. Calibrate X–ray tube focal bias voltage – see Job Card IST 002.
4. Calibrate X–ray tube mA measurement – see Job Card IST 016.
5. Calibrate X–ray tube kV scale factor – see Job Card IST 017.
6. Calibrate X–Ray tube heater current – see Job Card IST 003.
7. Calibrate photo cell HV measurement and scale factor – see Job Card IST 004.
8. Calibrate photo cell sensitivity as a function of its voltage – see Job Card IST 005.

SECTION 3
GANTRY CALIBRATION

1. Check jumpers and switches – see Job Card IST 037.


2. Calibrate compression force detector – see Job Card IST 023.
3. Test minimum compression/decompression force – see Job Card IST 024.
4. Calibrate breast thickness measurement – see Job Card IST 025.
5. Calibrate grid position – see Job Card IST 026.
6. Calibrate X–ray tube reference angle – see Job Card IST 029.
7. Check X–ray film format geometry – see Job Card IST 027.

2–1
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

8. Calibrate collimator blades reference positions – see Job Card IST 030.
9. Calibrate light centering device– see Job Card IST 036 and 028.
10. Test for absence of grid lines on exposed film – see Job Card IST 031.

SECTION 4
AEC CALIBRATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR

When a new screen pair is being introduced, follow the sequence Calibrate AEC for each
screen pair given in the Installation Steering in chapter 1, and the AEC flow chart (see illustra-
tion 1–17 in Chapter 1).
CALIBRATION

SECTION 5
AEC CALIBRATION ON STEREOTIX 2

When the Stereotix 2 option is installed after initial installation of a Senographe DMR, follow
the sequence given below:

1. set up and calibrate the Stereotix 2 according to the Stereotix 2 Service Manual
2. calibrate photocell in Stereotix 2 positions (see Job Card IST 018)
3. Calibrate reference energy in Stereotix 2 mode (see Job Card IST 019).

FOR SAFETY REASONS IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT THE GANTRY IS AN-


WARNING CHORED TO THE FLOOR WITH 3 BOLTS WHEN A SENOGRAPHE DMR IS
EQUIPPED WITH THE STEREOTIX 2 (see Job Card IST 009).

SECTION 6
RE–CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE OPTICAL DENSITY IN NON–STEREOTIX 2 MODE

To re–calibrate the reference optical density, follow the sequence below:

1. Set up the following exposure:


D any compression paddle installed
D contact (no magnification)
D grid installed
D 40 mm plexiglass on the cassette holder
D mode: AEC (1–point)
D screen pair: select the name of the screen pair being calibrated
D focal spot: LARGE
D track: MO
D filter: MO
D manual density correction: +0
D HV: 28 kV.
2. Take an exposure using a cassette and undeveloped film corresponding to the screen
pair being calibrated. Write down the resulting mAs value.
3. Perform the section entitled Calibration of Reference Energy in Job Card IST 014, but
do not use the default mAs value for the first exposure – instead, enter the mAs value
obtained in the exposure above.

2–2
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

4. Perform the section entitled Check Results in Job Card IST 014.

SECTION 7
CUSTOMER REQUESTED RE–CALIBRATION OF STEREOTIX 2 MODE REFERENCE OPTICAL DENSITY

When the customer requests a re–calibration of Stereotix 2 mode reference optical density,
perform Job Card IST 019 in its entirety.

CALIBRATION

2–3
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

Blank page
CALIBRATION

2–4
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHAPTER 3 – JOB CARDS

JOB CARD IST 001 – CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
JOB CARD IST 002 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . 3–9
JOB CARD IST 003 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
JOB CARD IST 004 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASUREMENT AND SCALE FACTOR . . . . . 3–19
JOB CARD IST 005 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE 3–23
JOB CARD IST 006 – SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–27
JOB CARD IST 007 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–31
JOB CARD IST 008 – UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–51
JOB CARD IST 009 – PHYSICAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–55
JOB CARD IST 010 – CONNECTING THE CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–57
JOB CARD IST 011 – CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–69
JOB CARD IST 012 – LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–75
JOB CARD IST 013 – CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE COMPENSATION

JOB CARDS
FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–79
JOB CARD IST 014 – CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . 3–89
JOB CARD IST 015 – CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION ARM ANGULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–97
JOB CARD IST 016 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE MA MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–99
JOB CARD IST 017 – CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–103
JOB CARD IST 018 – CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–109
JOB CARD IST 019 – CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STEREOTIX 2 MODE
FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–115
JOB CARD IST 020 – AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–123
JOB CARD IST 021 – CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM . . . . . 3–125
JOB CARD IST 022 – CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–131
JOB CARD IST 023 – CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–133
JOB CARD IST 024 – MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION FORCE TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–135
JOB CARD IST 025 – CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–139
JOB CARD IST 026 – CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–143
JOB CARD IST 027 – CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–145
JOB CARD IST 028 – LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–159
JOB CARD IST 029 – CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE REFERENCE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–165
JOB CARD IST 030 – CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT, COLLIMATOR BLADE
REFERENCE POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–169
JOB CARD IST 031 – TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON EXPOSED FILM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–173
JOB CARD IST 032 – REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE COVERS AND PANELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–177
JOB CARD IST 033 – PRELIMINARY GENERATOR AND GANTRY TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–181
JOB CARD IST 034 – CHECKING SAFE–LIGHTING AND FILM PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–187
JOB CARD IST 035 – REPLACEMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–191
JOB CARD IST 036 – ADJUSTMENT OF CENTERING DEVICE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–195

3–1
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

JOB CARD IST 037 – JUMPERS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–205


JOB CARD IST 038 – REGULATORY AND SAFETY LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–209
JOB CARD IST 039 – MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP STRATEGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR . . . 3–213
JOB CARD IST 040 – SETTING OF ELEVATOR UPPER TRAVEL LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–217
JOB CARD IST 041 – GENERAL ERRORS DURING THE CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–221
JOB CARD IST 042 – CONNECTING ROOM LAMPS AND ROOM DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–229
JOB CARD IST 043 – DMR INSTALLATION FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–233
JOB CARD IST 044 – SETTING PADDLE DEFORMATION PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–247
JOB CARD IST 045 – PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FOLLOW–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–249
JOB CARD IST 046 – CHECKS ON PRE-EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–253
JOB CARD IST 047 – CHECK OF VIEWBOX(ES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–259
JOB CARD IST 048 – CHECK OF SENSITOMETRIC STABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–263
JOB CARD IST 050 – A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR CONTACT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–267
JOB CARD IST 051 – A0 OPTIMIZATION FOR MAGNIFICATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–269
JOB CARDS

3–2
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 001 1 of 6

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE Version No.:


FACTOR Date :

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D True R.M.S. AC ammeter
e.g: Fluke 8060, Fluke 87, Fluke 45. HP 3457A, Tektronix DMM 254.

JOB CARDS
D HV unit / cable adaptor, Part number 36003399.

IMPORTANT NOTE:
To ensure an accurate measurement:
D For ALL Digital Multimeters, the Autorange function MUST NOT be used, as it can lead to severe mea-
surement errors (>40% !!).
D For ALL Digital Multimeters, the Relative Measurement function MUST NOT be used to reset to zero
the natural offset displayed when there is no current measured. The offset is automatically reset to zero
by the principle of the rms measurement.
D Measurement configurations to be used are as follows:
a. Fluke 8060: used with 20–A shunt in the 200–mV AC range (shunt reference: 80J10).
b. Fluke 87: no shunt, in the 10–A AC range.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

In case of equipment breakdown or service engineer error during this cal-


CAUTION ibration procedure, the resulting parameter values might become so unrea-
sonable as to render the X–ray tube filament supply circuit unusable. This
can show up as an error message during power up, and thus inhibit use of the
calibration software. If this happens, the only way to cancel the error is to
manually re–enter the default parameter values (see section 5 for default
parameter values) and switch the Senographe DMR off and back on again
before again attempting a calibration.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None

3–3
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE


FACTOR Job Card IST 001 2 of 6

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR
The objective is to determine the scale factor K and fixed offset VOF between the X–ray tube filament current
command from the software and the real filament current value obtained. Each tube track has its own filament
supply circuit, so this calibration procedure is to be performed for each of the two tracks.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE K = +9.450E+0 (9.45) AND VOF = +0.000E+0 (0.0).

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for this calibration procedure.

5.1.1 Turn off the Senographe DMR.

5.1.2 Open the HV converter control signal inputs by disconnecting flat cable WG8 from generator com-
mand board 400–PL1 connector XJ7. This eliminates any possibility of energy build–up in the HV
JOB CARDS

unit during this calibration procedure.

5.1.3 Disconnect the DMR HV cable at the HV tank end.

5.1.4 Connect the HV cable to the HV unit / cable adaptor (36003399).

5.1.5 Connect the HV unit / cable adaptor to the DMR HV tank.

5.1.6 Connect the true r.m.s. AC ammeter in series with the filament being calibrated
on the HV unit / cable adaptor; and place a jumper on the other track (see illustrations 1 and 2).

Note: See “important note” in section 2 to ensure an accurate measurement.

Note: Keep the other filament connected in order to avoid error messages when the Senographe DMR
is switched on.

3–4
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE


FACTOR Job Card IST 001 3 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 1
HV UNIT HV CABLE ADAPTOR 36003399
Track 2 (Rh): jumper or ammeter
From HV tank To X Ray tube
HV cable
shield

–HT –HT
TRACK 2 (Rh) C C TRACK 2 (Rh)
TRACK 1 (Mo) TRACK 1 (Mo)
L S S L
BIAS BIAS
G G
Ground (+HV) Ground (+HV)

JOB CARDS
C G
Bias measurement
Track 1 (Mo): jumper or ammeter

Note: For safety purpose, –HT is permanently connected to ground

3–5
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE


FACTOR Job Card IST 001 4 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 2
HV CABLE CONNECTOR PIN CONNECTION DIAGRAM

L
NOTE: THIS IS A HEAD–ON VIEW
OF THE HV CABLE CONNECTOR
AFTER BEING DISCONNECTED
FROM THE HV UNIT.
G
POLARIZING TAB C

S
JOB CARDS

The HV cable connector is marked with the standard X–ray industry markings (L, S, C and G).
However, the functions of the corresponding conductors in the Senographe DMR are as follows:

L = track 1 (Mo) filament supply

S = track 2 (Rh) filament supply

C = filament supply return and X–ray tube cathode HV

G = focal bias voltage supply

5.1.7 Switch on the Senographe DMR.

Note: ERROR 007/024 is normal with 400 PL1 XJ7 disconnected.

5.1.8 Change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on generator CPU board
400–PL3, see ”Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure” in chapter 1).

5.2 Perform the calibration procedure for the desired X–ray tube track.

5.2.1 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/HTR_SCL/TRACK1 (or TRACK2)


/CALIB/1st pt/CALIB on the console for the first calibration point.

Note: The default filament current command value for this first point is +4.000E+00 (4.0) A.

3–6
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE


FACTOR Job Card IST 001 5 of 6

5.2.2 Press the 2nd trigger button (no X–rays are produced) and hold it until the ammeter reading stabi-
lizes (this may take a few seconds).

5.2.3 Note the filament current value measured from the ammeter.

5.2.4 Release the 2nd trigger button.

5.2.5 Select SETUP/MeasI on the console.

5.2.6 Enter and validate the measured filament current value from the ammeter for this first calibration
point.

5.2.7 Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the console for the first calibration point.

Note: The default filament current command value for this second point is +5.000E+00 (5.0) A.

JOB CARDS
5.2.8 Press the 2nd trigger button (no X–rays are produced) and hold it until the ammeter reading stabi-
lizes (this may take a few seconds).

5.2.9 Note the filament current value measured from the ammeter.

5.2.10 Release the 2nd trigger button.

5.2.11 Select SETUP/MeasI on the console.

5.2.12 Enter and validate the measured filament current value from the ammeter for this second calibration
point.

5.2.13 Select SETUP/SETUP/calcul/VALID on the console. This executes the calculation of the scale
factor and fixed offset of the filament current command from the software.

5.3 Check the calibration accuracy.

5.3.1 Select SETUP/1st pt/CALIB on the console.

Note: Again, the default filament current command value for this first point is +4.000E+00 (4.0) A.

5.3.2 Press the 2nd trigger button (no X–rays are produced) and hold it until the ammeter reading stabi-
lizes (this may take a few seconds).

5.3.3 Note the filament current value measured from the ammeter.

5.3.4 Release the 2nd trigger button.

3–7
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE


FACTOR Job Card IST 001 6 of 6

5.3.5 Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the console.

Note: Again, the default filament current command value for this second point is +5.000E+00 (5.0) A.

5.3.6 Press the 2nd trigger button (no X–rays are produced) and hold it until the ammeter reading stabi-
lizes (this may take a few seconds).

5.3.7 Note the filament current value measured from the ammeter.

5.3.8 Release the 2nd trigger button.

5.3.9 The expected results are 4.0 ± 0.02 A for the first point and 5.0 ± 0.02 A for the second point. If the
results are within these tolerances, the calibration for this X–ray tube track is finished. If the results
are out of tolerance, repeat the calibration procedure in section 5.2 and the check procedure in sec-
tion 5.3 for the same X–ray tube track.
JOB CARDS

Note: Performing the calibration procedure once is normally sufficient for correct calibration.

Note: If it is necessary to perform the calibration procedure more than once, the measured values of cur-
rent for the two points (4.0 and 5.0 A) should become increasingly accurate. If not, the procedure
is probably not being followed correctly.

5.3.10 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. Note down the calculated values of scale
factor K and offset VOF. Each of these two values can be displayed alternately by rotating the kV
dial on the console.

If the value of K is less than +8.000E+0 (8.0), either the calibration procedure
CAUTION was done incorrectly or there is a hardware defect.

5.3.11 Repeat the calibration and check procedures on the other tube track, if necessary.

5.3.12 Perform a ”CKSUM”, then turn the system off

5.3.13 Re–connect flat cable WG8 to generator command board 400–PL1 connector XJ7, remove high
voltage cable adapter. Do not forget to secure the HV ring with the Allen screw, to insure proper
ground continuity.

3–8
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 002 1 of 6

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS Version No.:


VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Voltmeter
D HV unit / cable adaptor, part number 36003399

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

In case of equipment breakdown or service engineer error during this cal-


CAUTION ibration procedure, the resulting parameter values might become so unrea-
sonable as to render the X–ray tube focal bias voltage supply circuit
unusable. This can show up as an error message during power up, and thus
inhibit use of the calibration software. If this happens, the only way to cancel
the error is to manually re–enter the default parameter values (see section 5
for these values) and switch the Senographe DMR+ off and back on again
before again attempting a calibration.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 001 CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR

3–9
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS


VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR Job Card IST 002 2 of 6

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR
The objective is to determine the scale factor alpha and offset beta between the X–ray tube focal bias voltage
command from the software and the real focal bias voltage value obtained. The focal bias voltage applied to
the X–ray tube electron beam concentration device establishes the focal spot width.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE ALPHA = +9.389E+1 (93.89) AND BETA = +3.801E–2
(0.03801).

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR+ for this calibration procedure.

5.1.1 Turn off the Senographe DMR+.

5.1.2 Open the HV converter control signal inputs by disconnecting flat cable WG8 from generator com-
mand board 400–PL1 connector XJ7. This eliminates any possibility of energy build–up in the HV
JOB CARDS

unit during this calibration procedure.

5.1.3 Disconnect the DMR+ HV cable at the HV tank end.

5.1.4 Connect the HV cable to the HV unit / cable adaptor (36003399).

5.1.5 Connect the HV unit / cable adaptor to the DMR+ HV tank.

5.1.6 Connect a DC voltmeter between common (C) and the focal bias voltage wire (G) (see illustrations
1 and 2).

3–10
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS


VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR Job Card IST 002 3 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 1
HV UNIT HV CABLE ADAPTOR 36003399

Track 2 (Rh): jumper or ammeter


From HV tank To X Ray tube
HV cable
shield

–HT –HT
TRACK 2 (Rh) C C TRACK 2 (Rh)
TRACK 1 (Mo) TRACK 1 (Mo)
L S S L
BIAS BIAS

JOB CARDS
G G
Ground (+HV) Ground (+HV)

C G
Bias measurement
Track 1 (Mo): jumper or ammeter

Note: For safety purpose, –HT is permanently connected to ground

3–11
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS


VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR Job Card IST 002 4 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 2
HV CABLE CONNECTOR PIN CONNECTION DIAGRAM

L
NOTE: THIS IS A HEAD–ON VIEW
OF THE HV CABLE CONNECTOR
AFTER BEING DISCONNECTED
FROM THE HV UNIT.
G
POLARIZING TAB C

S
JOB CARDS

The HV cable connector is marked with the standard X–ray industry markings (L, S, C and G).
However, the functions of the corresponding conductors in the Senographe DMR+ are as fol-
lows:

L = track 1 (Mo) filament supply

S = track 2 (Rh) filament supply

C = filament supply return and X–ray tube cathode HV

G = focal bias voltage supply

5.1.7 Switch on the Senographe DMR+.


ERROR 007/024 is normal with 400 PL1 XJ7 disconnected.

5.1.8 Change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on generator CPU board
400–PL3, see Accessing the Different Installation Menus in the Tree Structure in chapter 1).

5.1.9 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/BIAS/VOLTAGE on the console.

3–12
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS


VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR Job Card IST 002 5 of 6

5.1.10 Rotate the kV dial in order to check that all four focal bias voltage command values are the same
as the values specified on the label on the X-ray tube housing:
MO/LF = . . . . . . . . . . .

RH/LF = . . . . . . . . . . . .

MO/SF = . . . . . . . . . . .

RH/SF = . . . . . . . . . . . .

Modify any values that appear different from these on the tube label by using the
CAUTION CHANGE key, rotating the kV dial and using the NEXT, VALID and SETUP
keys. See ”Visual Display of Parameter Values” and ”Modification of a Parameter
Value or Entry of a Measurement” in chapter 1.

JOB CARDS
5.2 Perform the calibration procedure.

5.2.1 Select SETUP/CALIB/1st pt/CALIB on the console for the first calibration point.

5.2.2 Press the 2nd trigger button (no X–rays are produced) and hold it until the voltmeter reading stabi-
lizes.

5.2.3 Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter.

5.2.4 Release the 2nd trigger button.

5.2.5 Select SETUP/MeasV on the console.

5.2.6 Enter and validate the absolute value of measured focal bias voltage value from the voltmeter for
this first calibration point. See ”Entry of an Alpha–Numeric Value” in chapter 1 for information on
entering alpha–numeric values.

5.2.7 Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the console for the second calibration point.

5.2.8 Press the 2nd trigger button (no X–rays are produced) and hold it until the voltmeter reading stabi-
lizes.

5.2.9 Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter.

5.2.10 Release the 2nd trigger button.

5.2.11 Select SETUP/MeasV on the console.

5.2.12 Enter and validate the measured focal bias voltage value from the voltmeter for this second calibra-
tion point.

3–13
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS


VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR Job Card IST 002 6 of 6

5.2.13 Select SETUP/SETUP/calcul/VALID on the console. This executes the calculation of the parame-
ters alpha and beta. The message ”CALCUL DONE” appears on the console display.

5.3 Check the calibration accuracy.

5.3.1 Select SETUP/1st pt/CALIB on the console.

5.3.2 Press the 2nd trigger button (no X–rays are produced) and hold it until the voltmeter reading stabi-
lizes.

5.3.3 Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter for the first point.

5.3.4 Release the 2nd trigger button. DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.

5.3.5 Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the console.


JOB CARDS

5.3.6 Press the 2nd trigger button (no X–rays are produced) and hold it until the voltmeter reading stabi-
lizes.

5.3.7 Note the focal bias voltage value measured from the voltmeter for the second point.

5.3.8 Release the 2nd trigger button. DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.

5.3.9 The expected results for the first point are the value of MO/LF ±5% for the first point and the value
of MO/SF ±5% for the second point (see section 5.1.10 for these values). If the results are within
these tolerances, the focal bias voltage calibration is finished. If the results are out of tolerance,
repeat the calibration procedure in section 5.2 and the check procedure in section 5.3.

Note: Performing the calibration procedure once is normally sufficient for correct calibration.

Note: If it is necessary to perform the calibration procedure more than once, the measured values of focal
bias voltage for the two points should become increasingly accurate. If not, the procedure is prob-
ably not being followed correctly.

5.3.10 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. Note down the calculated values of
parameters alpha and beta. Each of these two values can be displayed alternately by rotating the kV
dial on the console.

5.3.11 Perform a ”CKSUM”, then turn the system off.

5.3.12 Re–connect flat cable WG8 to generator command board 400–PL1 connector XJ7, remove high
voltage cable adapter. Do not forget to secure the HV ring with the Allen screw, to insure proper
ground continuity.

3–14
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 003 1 of 4

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER Version No.:


CURRENT Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
None

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION This procedure produces X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The following procedures must have been performed in the following order:
D Job Card IST 001 CALIBRATION OF HEATER CURRENT SCALE FACTOR
D Job Card IST 002 CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR
D Job Card IST 016 CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE MA MEASUREMENT
D Job Card IST 017 CALIBRATION OF kV SCALE FACTOR

3–15
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER


CURRENT Job Card IST 003 2 of 4

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT
The objective is to determine the X–ray tube heater current necessary for producing the desired X–ray tube
anode current at a given kV value.
The calibration procedure must be performed on each focal size/track combination. Four repetitions of the cal-
ibration procedure are therefore necessary.
Three exposures are taken automatically at different kV values. Using the results, the software calculates the
necessary parameters to determine the X–ray tube heater current needed to produce the desired X–ray tube
anode current for all possible kV values.

5.1 Perform the calibration procedure.

5.1.1 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch
B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3) or enter password on console.
JOB CARDS

Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to the
service menu.

5.1.2 Select the following menu sequence on the console: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/


TUBE/HEATER/focal size/track/CALIB

Note: /focal size/track/ must be SF/RH for the first combination performed.

To avoid excessive X-ray doses on the photo-cell tube, place an empty cassette
CAUTION on the top of the image receptor.

5.1.3 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. The messages EXPOSURE NO 1, EXPOSURE NO
2, EXPOSURE NO 3 and CALIBRATION END appear sequentially on the console display. The
software automatically performs the three exposures and the calculations.

Note: Calibration time varies according to tube temperature. The message TOO HOT appears on the
console display when tube temperature is excessive for taking the next exposure. It is not neces-
sary to hold the 2nd trigger button down while waiting for the tube to cool. However, do not exit
the calibration menu while waiting. As soon as the TOO HOT message disappears, continue the
calibration by pressing the 2nd trigger button and holding it down.

Note: In case of arcing, the software re–attempts the same exposure automatically.

Note: The calibration procedure includes an exposure at 40 kV. If for some reason this exposure is
impossible to perform (e.g. excessive arcing), tube warm–up may be necessary (see Job Card
IST 020 AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP).

3–16
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER


CURRENT Job Card IST 003 3 of 4

5.1.4 Repeat sections 5.1.2 to 5.1.3 for each of the remaining focal size/track combinations in the follow-
ing order: SF/Mo, LF/Rh, LF/Mo.

5.1.5 Perform this step only if a warning message is displayed.


The generator firmware can display the Limited Ich message on the console at the end of the
tube–current calibration IST 003. This message is only a warning and therefore not associated
with an error code.
Limited Ich (limited heater current) means that one or more filament heating current values were
calculated above 5.6 A (but internally limited to 5.600 A when stored in memory). To handle
this warning, proceed as follows:

1. Access the DMR installation menu to read the heater parameters (the path is: SETUP/GENE/
INSTAL/GENE/GENE/TUBE/HEATER/LF/MO/Param/I–Value). If necessary, see DMR
menu structure in service manual (Ill. 1–7).

JOB CARDS
2. Explore the 28 kV/A combinations and note the kV values showing a current value equal to
5.600 A.

3. Repeat Step 2. for the LF/RH combination (there is a very low probability of current limitation
occurring in small focus).

4. Return to Application Mode (set–up button).

5. Set the DMR for 2–point exposure technique at 60 mAs. Make an exposure for each kV point
detected at 5.600 A (LF/MO and LF/RH). Allow at least 60 seconds between each exposure.

6. Repeat Steps 1. and 2.: If no more kV point are set to 5.600 A, the problem has been resolved.
If there is still one or more points showing a current value of 5.600 A make Job Card IST 001,
then restart this procedure from Step 1 above. If the problem recurs, replace the X–ray tube.

5.2 Check the results.

5.2.1 Be sure that the gantry presence parameter PRES_A is set to YES before proceeding (see Gantry
Present/Absent in Chapter 1).

5.2.2 Activate the display of parameters following an exposure (see Display of Parameters Following an
Exposure in Chapter 1).

5.2.3 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode (Path is: SETUP/GENE/INSTALL/CKSUM/
CKSUM.

5.2.4 Set up the Senographe DMR for a manual (2–point) exposure at 30 kV and 63 mAs. For each of
the four focal size/track combination, take an exposure following a 3-second preparation time. Note
the resulting X–ray tube anode currents displayed on the console display.

Note: A lower mAs value cannot would decrease the measurement accuracy.

3–17
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER


CURRENT Job Card IST 003 4 of 4

5.2.5 The table below shows the expected X–ray tube anode current for each focal size/track combina-
tion:
Value available for Maxiray 70TH–F tube:
LF/RH – 62 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
SF/RH – 35 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
LF/MO – 100 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
SF/MO – 40 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy

Value available for GS412 tube:


LF/RH – 75 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
SF/RH – 40 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
LF/MO – 100 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy
JOB CARDS

SF/MO – 40 mA ± 5% ± DVM accuracy

5.2.6 If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off, then
on again.

3–18
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 004 1 of 4

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV Version No.:


MEASUREMENT AND SCALE FACTOR Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Voltmeter

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

THESE CALIBRATION PROCEDURES INVOLVE CONNECTING A


WARNING VOLTMETER TO THE PHOTO-CELL HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIR-
CUITS WHICH OPERATE AT APPROXIMATELY 800 VDC. USE
APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS WHEN IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO
THESE CIRCUITS.

In case of equipment breakdown or service engineer error during these cal-


CAUTION ibration procedures, the resulting parameter values might become so unrea-
sonable as to render the photo-cell board unusable. This can show up as an
error message during power up, and thus inhibit use of the calibration soft-
ware. If this happens, the only way to cancel the error is to manually re–enter
the default parameter value (see sections 5 and 6 for these values) and switch
the Senographe DMR off and back on again before again attempting a cal-
ibration.

These procedures must be done with cables W14 and W15 connected to
CAUTION gantry photo-cell board 800–PL4 connectors XJ3 and XJ2, respectively.

Note: These two calibration procedures must always be done together and in the order presented. Follow
the procedure in section 5 and then the procedure in section 6.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None

3–19
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASU-


REMENT AND SCALE FACTOR Job Card IST 004 2 of 4

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASUREMENT
The objective is to determine the scale factor F/HV between the real photo-cell HV value and the photo-cell
HV measurement input to the software. This is accomplished by sending a theoretical photo-cell HV command
value of +7.000E+2 (700) V from the software and measuring the real voltage obtained. The measured value
is entered and the software calculates the value of F/HV.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUE IS F/HV = +1.797E+2 (179.7) Hz/V

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for this calibration procedure.

5.1.1 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch
B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3) or enter password on console.

Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
JOB CARDS

UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

5.1.2 Carefully connect a voltmeter set to 1000 VDC to the photo-cell HV (+ve lead to the terminal lug
on the frame of the gantry photo-cell board 800–PL4 connector XJ2, and –ve lead to the gantry pho-
to-cell board 800–PL4 test point TP1, marked –HT).

5.1.3 Ensure that the gantry is present by selecting SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/CONFIG/CON-


FIG/PRES/PRES_B/YES on the console (see Gantry Present/Absent (PRES_A) in Chapter 1).

3–20
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASU-


REMENT AND SCALE FACTOR Job Card IST 004 3 of 4

5.2 Perform the calibration procedure.

5.2.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/AOP/FILM/CELL/ HV/DAC / FREQ/HV /CALIB/


CALIB/START. The message Working appears on the console display.

5.2.2 Wait for the voltmeter reading to stabilize, and note its absolute (positive) value.

5.2.3 Select STOP – the message Done appears on the console display.

5.2.4 Select SETUP/HV_M on the console.

5.2.5 Enter and validate the absolute (positive) value of the voltmeter reading by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parame-
ter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1).

5.2.6 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID – the message Calcul done appears on the console display.

JOB CARDS
5.3 Check the calibration accuracy.

5.3.1 Activate the display of parameters following an exposure by selecting SETUP six times, then
CONFIG/DISP/YES (see Chapter 1, Display of Parameters Following an Exposure).

5.3.2 Perform a CKSUM and return to 2-point application mode.

5.3.3 Press the 1st trigger button and hold it down until the voltmeter reading stabilizes. Note the absolute
(positive) value of the voltmeter reading. Release the 1st trigger button.

5.3.4 Check that the photo-cell HV value displayed on the console display is within ±1%, ±0.1V, plus
voltmeter error, of the voltmeter reading taken in step 5.3.3.

5.3.5 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/CELL/ HV/DAC / FREQ/HV /PARAM


on the console. Note down the calculated gain factor F/HV.

5.3.6 Leave the voltmeter connected and proceed directly to section 6.

SECTION 6
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV SCALE FACTOR
The objective is to determine the scale factor alpha and offset beta between the photo-cell HV command value
from the software and the real photo-cell HV value obtained. The calibration is fully automatic.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE ALPHA = +2.567E–1 (0.2567) AND BETA = +2.184E+0 (2.184).

6.1 Perform the calibration procedure.

6.1.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/ HV/DAC /CALIB/START – the messages Working, then Done appear
on the console display.

6.1.2 Select SETUP/PARAM. Write down the calculated values of scale factor alpha and offset beta.
Each of these two values is displayed alternately by rotating the kV dial on the console.

3–21
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL HV MEASU-


REMENT AND SCALE FACTOR Job Card IST 004 4 of 4

6.2 Check the calibration accuracy.

6.2.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/ FREQ/HV /CALIB/REF.

6.2.2 Enter and validate a photo-cell HV reference value of +4.000E+2 (400) V by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parame-
ter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1).

6.2.3 Select SETUP/CALIB/START – the message Working appears on the console display.

6.2.4 Wait for the voltmeter reading to stabilize. The voltmeter reading must be 400 ±5V. Do not enter
this measured value.

6.2.5 Select STOP – the message Done appears on the console display.

6.2.6 Select SETUP/REF on the console.


JOB CARDS

6.2.7 Enter and validate a photo-cell HV reference value of +6.000E+2 (600) V by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial.

6.2.8 Select SETUP/CALIB/START – the message Working appears on the console display.

6.2.9 Wait for the voltmeter reading to stabilize. The voltmeter reading must be 600 ±5V. Do not enter
this measured value.

6.2.10 Select STOP – the message Done appears on the console display.

6.2.11 Repeat steps 6.2.6 to 6.2.10 using a photo-cell HV reference value of +8.000E+2 (800) V. In this
case, the resulting voltmeter reading must be 800 ±5V.

6.2.12 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode. If you are handing the machine back to the user
at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off, then on again.

3–22
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 005 1 of 4

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY Version No.:


AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 20 x 20 cm to insure com-
plete covering of the photo cell)

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION This procedure produces X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 004 ”CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL HV MEASUREMENT AND SCALE FAC-
TOR”
D Remove the protective film from bucky top plate.

Note: In case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for explanations.

3–23
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY


AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE Job Card IST 005 2 of 4

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE
The photo cell’s sensitivity to light varies as a function of its voltage. This phenomenon is exploited by the
Senographe DMR to compensate for all the different possible configurations encountered in application mode
(kV, SID, etc.). The Senographe DMR determines the needed photo cell sensitivity for a given configuration
and applies the appropriate photo cell HV.
The objective here is to determine the coefficients beta and gamma that define the relationship between photo
cell HV and photo cell sensitivity. A third coefficient, alpha, is always equal to zero.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE ALPHA = +0.000E+0 (0), BETA = +7.377E+0 (7.377) AND
GAMMA = –4.931E+1 (–49.31).

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for this calibration procedure.

5.1.1 Calibration of heater current.


JOB CARDS

– Set up the senographe DMR in the following configuration:


Mode: Manuel (2–point).
Bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid).
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 28 kV
mAs: 100 mAs
– Take the exposure

To avoid excessive X–Ray doses on the photo–cell tube, place an empty cas-
CAUTION sette on the top of the image receptor.

5.1.2 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch
B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3).

Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

5.1.3 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


6 cm of plexiglass
Contact (no magnification)
Bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid).
SID = 660 mm
No cassette

Note: To insure that the photo cell is fully covered by the plexiglass, be sure that it overlaps the front
edge of the cassette holder by about 1 cm.

3–24
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY


AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE Job Card IST 005 3 of 4

5.2 Perform the calibration procedure.

5.2.1 Starting from application mode, select


SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/CELL/ PM/HV /CALIB on the console.

5.2.2 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A series of X–ray exposures is taken. If more, or less,
plexiglass is needed to successfully perform the calibration, the message ”not enough plex” or ”too
much plexi” appears on the console display, and the series of exposures is halted.
If this happens:
– Release the 2nd trigger button and, according to the message, either add or remove
1 cm of plexiglass,
– Select SETUP/CALIB on the console,
– Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down again,

JOB CARDS
– Continue the procedure.

5.2.3 When the calibration is successful and complete, the series of X–ray exposures halts automatically
and the message ”calibration end” appears on the console display. At this point, release the 2nd trig-
ger button.

5.2.4 Select SETUP/PARAM on the console. Note down the calculated values of parameters beta and
gamma. Each of these values is displayed by rotating the kV dial on the console. Since the third
parameter, alpha, always has a value of zero, it is not necessary to note it down.

Note: The value of alpha MUST be zero. Do not modify it under any circumstances.

5.2.5 Perform a ”CKSUM” and return to application mode. If you’re turning the machine back over to
the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off, then on again.

3–25
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL SENSITIVITY


AS A FUNCTION OF ITS VOLTAGE Job Card IST 005 4 of 4

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–26
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 006 1 of 4

Purpose: SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND Version No.:


CONFIGURATION Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
None

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

NEVER leave the Senographe DMR unattended during calibration of a


CAUTION screen pair.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None

3–27
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND


CONFIGURATION Job Card IST 006 2 of 4

SECTION 5
SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION
The objective is to select and configure a screen pair prior to performing AEC calibrations on it.

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for this procedure.


Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on gen-
erator CPU board 400–PL3).

Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

5.2 Choose the screen pair to be configured and calibrated.


Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x on the
console, where x is the screen pair indicator (A,B,C,D or E) corresponding to one of the 5 possible screen pairs
JOB CARDS

to be calibrated.

Note: Do not confuse the screen pair indicator with the screen pair name, which is chosen via the proce-
dure in section 5.6. While the 5 screen pair indicators cannot be changed and do not appear in
application mode, each of them can be assigned a screen pair name corresponding to the film/cas-
sette combination used, which appears on the console display in application AOP (0–point) and
AEC (1–point) modes.

5.3 Enable/disable screen pair.


Select SETUP/VALID on the console. This function gives the possibility to enable or disable the use of the
screen pair in application. Select NO to disable and YES to enable the screen pair.
D If yes is selected, then complete the entire calibration of the screen pair (see flow chart of AEC / AOP
calibration; illustration 1–17; in the installation chapter 1).
D If no is selected, the user could not select the screen pair name which means that the entire calibration
of the screen pair was not completely done.

5.4 Choose screen type.


Screen type would be chosen by selecting TYPE on the console. However, the present version of the Seno-
graphe DMR does not provide any options for screen type. If you select TYPE, be sure to select SETUP before
proceeding to the next section.

5.5 Choose default AOP strategy.


Select STRAT/MEDIUM on the console.

Note: This default AOP strategy value will be verified and changed, if necessary, at the end of screen
pair calibration. This value has no effect on screen pair calibration.

3–28
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND


CONFIGURATION Job Card IST 006 3 of 4

5.6 Choose screen pair name.


Select SETUP/NAME on the console. Enter and validate the desired screen pair name, which can contain up
to 7 characters (A to Z, 0 to 9, and colon ”:”) – see Entry of an Alpha–Numeric Value in Chapter 1 for informa-
tion on entering alpha–numeric values.
This is the name that appears on the console display in application AOP (0–point) and AEC (1–point) modes.

Note: The default screen pair name is the screen pair indicator. See section 5.2.
Typically, this name is an abbreviation of the film and cassette type used to constitute the screen pair being
used. It is a good idea to ask the doctor for suggestions for the screen pair name.

Note: This name can be changed at any time in the future without producing the need to re-perform any
calibrations on the screen pair in question.

5.7 Proceed to the screen pair calibration procedures.

JOB CARDS
Once you have completed the procedures in this Job Card, perform a CKSUM, return to application mode and
proceed directly to Job Card IST 007, Calibration of Photo Cell Gain for a Given Screen Pair.

3–29
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND


CONFIGURATION Job Card IST 006 4 of 4

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–30
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 007 1 of 20

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A Version No.:


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:

Time: hh min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Normal cassette of type used in the screen pair being calibrated (same cassette for all the procedure)
D Film of type used in the screen pair being calibrated.

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Screen–less cassette simulation tool OR cassette of type used in the screen pair being calibrated, but with-

JOB CARDS
out its screen (see section 5.2)
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 10 mm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 200 x 200 mm to ensure
complete coverage of the photo-cell)
Tool reference : 45 203 014 or 46–286893P1 (US pole).
Thickness accuracy of plexiglass plates is mandatory (10  0.2 mm)

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

NEVER leave the Senographe DMR unattended during calibration of a


CAUTION screen pair.

CAUTION These procedures produce X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

If your equipment is delivered with the new magnification plastic cassette


CAUTION holder (pn 2147919), DO not USED the mode contact in magnification con-
figuration.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION
D About checksum, see chapter 1, para. 3–7.
D kV accuracy check (if applicable) followed by kVp recalibration must be performed before this job
card (see IST 033, para. 5.1.11).
D Job Cards IST 004 and IST005 must have been successfully performed.
D In case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for explanations.

3–31
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 2 of 20

SECTION 5
ADVANCE PREPARATION AND INFORMATION

5.1 Calibration steering. See illustration 1.


ILLUSTRATION 1
IST007 FLOWCHART

START

Other Film/Screen Other Film/Screen combination


First Film/Screen Calib. Combination with with the same Screen
NO another Screen type? NO
Perform section 8
step 1 through 10
JOB CARDS

YES YES
DMR+ set–up for the contact mode:
Sections 6.1/6.2

Calibration without Screen Last Film/Screen


Calibration
Section 6.3 with another NO
Check without Screen
Screen type?
Section 6.4 Copy parameters
Section 8 step 1 through 5
Calibration with Screen YES
Section 6.5
Perform DMR+ set–up for the contact mode:
Check with Screen
Section 7 Sections 6.1/6.2
Section 6.6
Calibration with Screen
Section 6.5
DMR+ set–up for the Magnification
mode Check with Screen
Section 6.7 Section 6.6

Calibration without Screen


Section 6.8 DMR+ set–up for the Magnification
mode
Check without Screen Section 6.7
Section 6.9
Calibration with Screen
Calibration with Screen
Section 6.10
Section 6.10
Check with Screen
Check with Screen
Section 6.11
Section 6.11

END
END

3–32
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 3 of 20

5.2 Information about cassettes and films used in these procedures

5.2.1 Determine whether or not the screen–less cassette simulation tool can be used.
The screen–less simulation tool can be used only if the cassette of the screen pair being calibrated
is among the following:
– KODAK Min–R 2
– FUJI MA
– AGFA–GEVAERT MAMORAY
– 3M
– DUPONT
– KONICA
If the cassette of the screen pair being installed is not among these models, the screen–less cassette

JOB CARDS
simulation tool cannot be used. In this case, a normal cassette of the type used in the screen pair
being calibrated must be used, but without its screen.

Note: If a screen–less cassette simulation tool is not available, any of the cassette models listed above,
without its screen*, can be used during calibration of any screen pair that uses any of the models
in the list. For example, if you’re calibrating a screen pair that uses the 3M cassette, you can use
a KODAK Min–R 2 cassette without its screen. However, if you are calibrating a screen pair that
uses a cassette model that is not on this list, you must use a cassette of that exact model, without
its screen.

* When removing the screen from a cassette, be sure to leave the layer of plastic foam intact in
the cassette.

3–33
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 4 of 20

5.2.2 Learn how to use the screen–less cassette simulation tool.


If used, the screen–less cassette simulation tool must always be loaded with an undeveloped film
of the type used in the screen pair being calibrated, as shown in illustration 1.

Note: It is normal for the film not to lie flat at the rear edge of the film holding area. The rear edge of
the film holding area was in fact designed to insure that the FRONT edge of the film butts up per-
fectly against the front edge of the film holding area. This is critical, because the photo-cell is
located towards the front edge of the bucky and must be maximally covered by the film.
The loaded screen–less cassette simulation tool must be installed in the Senographe DMR cassette
holder or in the bucky in the same way as an ordinary cassette.

Be sure to orient the simulation tool in the cassette holder with its front edge
CAUTION coinciding with the front edge of the bucky, as shown in illustration 1.
JOB CARDS

Note: Whenever the instructions in this Job Card instruct you to install the loaded cassette (without
screen) install the loaded simulation tool instead, if permitted (see section 5.2.1 above).

5.2.3 Each of the two cassettes (with and without screen) used in these procedures must be loaded with
undeveloped film of the type used in the screen pair being calibrated.
– The same two cassettes must be used for all procedures in this Job Card.
– The same undeveloped films can be left in the cassettes for all procedures in this Job
Card.
– Mark the cassette without screen clearly so as not to confuse it with the cassette with
screen (not applicable if screen–less cassette simulation tool is used).

5.3 Advance preparation if a new screen pair is being introduced


Select and configure a screen pair (see Job Card IST 006).

3–34
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 5 of 20

ILLUSTRATION 1
SCREEN–LESS CASSETTE SIMULATION TOOL

Screen–less cassette simulation tool

Rear edge (away from patient)

Rear edge of
film does not
lie flat against
simulation tool

JOB CARDS
Front edge (towards patient)

Undeveloped film

Film must be loaded with its front edge butted


up against the front rim of the simulation tool

Note: The loaded screen–less cassette simulation tool must be installed in


the cassette holder or in the bucky of the Senographe DMR, oriented
as shown.

3–35
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 6 of 20

5.4 General instructions to be observed during all procedures in this Job Card

5.4.1 The photo-cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout the procedures
in this Job Card.

Note: Number the plexiglass plates from 1 to 6 and use the same plates for the same thickness.

5.4.2 When selecting plexiglass thicknesses (2, 4 or 6 cm) in the menus between exposure sequences,
never go up in the menu structure higher than indicated in the procedure being performed. Doing
so will reset stored intermediate values and ruin the calibration. Also, once all three thicknesses
have been calibrated, follow the instructions immediately for performing the calculation. Select
SETUP no more than the precise number of times indicated, again at the risk of losing intermediate
values prior to the calculation.

5.4.3 On the other hand, if an error is made during the calibration of one of the three plexiglass thicknesses
JOB CARDS

(for example, the plexiglass was incorrectly placed or is not the correct thickness), then you must
go upward in the menus (by selecting SETUP a certain number of times) at least to the level that
gives the choices GRID, SCREEN and CALIB (just below PM_YLD). Here you reset the inter-
mediate values intentionally, and you must repeat all three thickness calibrations.

5.4.4 Normally, this Job Card is used when a new screen pair is being introduced. In this case, follow the
procedures in this Job Card in the exact order shown.

5.4.5 If, however, only part of the photo-cell gain calibration is being done (e.g. because of a mistake dur-
ing a certain part of the calibration), the procedures can be performed independently of the others,
but be sure to read and carry out all preliminary preparations and procedures associated with the
procedure in question.

5.4.6 When placing plexiglass on the cassette holder or 1.5 magnification device, the plexiglass must
always overlap the front edge (towards the patient) by about 1 cm to insure that the photo-cell is
fully covered.

5.4.7 When taking a series of calibration exposures, if arcing occurs, the arcing message appears on the
console display. This does not mean that the series must be repeated (i.e. the software keeps track
of which exposures in the series were successful even if it must repeat one due to arcing). Only if
there were a serious arcing problem would the software abort the series, in which case it would have
to be repeated.

5.4.8 If you are in the middle of IST 007, and must stop, continue at another time, there are certain steps
that you need not repeat. For example:
D if you have completed step 6.4.13, then you can start with step 6.5
D if you have completed step 6.6.13, then you can start with step 6.7
D if you have completed step 6.9.12, then you can start with step 6.10.

3–36
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 7 of 20

SECTION 6
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN
The objective is to determine the X–ray absorption of the screen. The calibration software achieves this by sub-
tracting the photo-cell gain obtained with a screen from the photo-cell gain obtained without a screen.
Therefore, each configuration must be calibrated twice – once with and once without a screen.
6 coefficients are calculated for each of 5 track/filter combinations. Thus, 30 coefficients are calculated for
each of 4 different cases (2 configurations, each calibrated once with and once without a screen), for a total
of 120 coefficients.

6.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for these procedures.

6.1.1 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch
B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3).

JOB CARDS
Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

6.1.2 Set the SID to that used by the user, 610 mm or the most common 660 mm.

6.2 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the procedures using contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ).

6.2.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


18 x 24 compression paddle installed
Contact (no magnification)
Bucky with Grid installed
SID as indicated in section 6.1.2

6.2.2 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/


FSC=x on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen
pair being calibrated. See Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGU-
RATION

6.2.3 Select CALIB/PM_yld/GRID/YES on the console. This sets up the calibration for the with grid
procedure.

3–37
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 8 of 20

6.3 Perform the procedure using contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ) and cassette without screen.

6.3.1 Be sure to be familiar with the advance preparation and information given in section 5 before pro-
ceeding, especially the information concerning the use, if permitted, of the screen–less cassette sim-
ulation tool. Also, be sure to prepare the Senographe DMR by following sections 6.1 and 6.2 before
proceeding.

6.3.2 Select SETUP/SCREEN/NO on the console. This sets up the calibration for the cassette without
screen procedure.

6.3.3 Install the loaded cassette (without screen).

BE VERY SURE THAT THE CASSETTE WITHOUT SCREEN IS


WARNING INSTALLED BECAUSE THE CHECK IN SECTION 6.4 WILL NOT
SHOW AN ERROR DUE TO A MISTAKE HERE.
JOB CARDS

6.3.4 Put 2 cm of plexiglass on the bucky 18 x 24.

6.3.5 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass.

6.3.6 Select SETUP/CALIB/CALIB/THICK/2 cm on the console. This tells the software the amount
of plexiglass present.

6.3.7 Select SETUP/CALIB on the console.

6.3.8 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A series of X–ray exposures is taken (at least 25).

6.3.9 When the series of exposures is complete, the message thick plexi end appears on the console dis-
play. At this point, release the 2nd trigger button.

6.3.10 Raise the compression paddle and increase the amount of plexiglass to 4 cm. Select SETUP/
THICK/4 cm on the console.

6.3.11 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass. Repeat sections 6.3.7 to 6.3.9.

6.3.12 Raise the compression paddle and increase the amount of plexiglass to 6 cm. Select SETUP/
THICK/6 cm on the console.

6.3.13 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass. Repeat sections 6.3.7 to 6.3.9.

6.3.14 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console. This executes the calculation of the 6 coefficients
(A0, A1, A2, B0, B1, and B2) for each of 5 track/filter combinations. The message PM_yld cal end
appears on the console display.

6.3.15 Proceed immediately to section 6.4 to check calibration accuracy.

3–38
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 9 of 20

6.4 Check the contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ) and cassette without screen calibration accuracy.

Note: This check must always be made immediately after performing the calibration procedure in sec-
tion 6.3.

6.4.1 Copy the without screen parameters for the screen pair being calibrated to the with screen parameter
location of an unused screen pair (generally E) by following this procedure:
– Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/
FILM/COPY/SOURCE/SCREEN/NO on the console.
– Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=x, where x is the screen pair indicator corresponding to the
screen pair being calibrated.
– Select SETUP/SETUP/TARG/SCREEN/YES.
– Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=y, where y is the indicator of the unused screen pair.

JOB CARDS
Be very sure of the choice of unused screen pair indicator y (A, B, C, D or E).
CAUTION If a mistake is made, there is a risk of erasing good parameter values on
another screen pair that is in use.

– Once you are SURE that the screen pair indicator y is correct (see CAUTION above),
copy the parameters by selecting SETUP/SETUP/COPY/VALID. The message
COPY EXECUTED appears on the console display.

6.4.2 If necessary, enable use of the unused screen pair. (From application mode, select SETUP/GENE/
INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=y/VALID/YES on the console.)

6.4.3 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. See Display of Parameters
Following an Exposure in chapter 1, section 3–10–2.

6.4.4 Perform a CKSUM and go to application mode.

6.4.5 Set up the Senographe DMR in the configuration given in section 6.2.1.

6.4.6 Install the loaded cassette (without screen).

6.4.7 Put 60 mm of plexiglass on the bucky.

6.4.8 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass.

3–39
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 10 of 20

6.4.9 Set up the following exposure:


Mode: AEC (1–point)
Screen pair: y (this is the indicator of the unused screen pair chosen in section 6.4.1)
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV

6.4.10 Take a short exposure. It is not necessary for the exposure to be complete, so the 2nd trigger button
can be released as soon as X–rays are being produced.

Note: Even if exposure is aborted due to insufficient available mAs, the thickness displayed on the con-
sole is useable. It is NOT USEFUL to wait for the tube to cool and repeat the exposure.
JOB CARDS

6.4.11 Note in the Job Card IST043 (IST007 data section) the thickness displayed on the console after the
exposure. It must be equal to the plexiglass thickness ±2 mm.

6.4.12 Repeat sections 6.4.8 to 6.4.11 using 4 cm and 2 cm of plexiglass.

6.4.13 If the displayed thickness is outside the tolerance given in section 6.4.11, first check that the correct
screen pair was selected in section 6.4.9. Otherwise, the corresponding calibration procedure (con-
tact mode with grid and cassette without screen, section 6.3) was probably done incorrectly. That
procedure, as well as this check procedure immediately following it, would have to be repeated (this
can be done independently of the other procedures in this Job Card).

Note: See formula in Job card IST043 (IST007 data):


Delta (4cm) must be greater than Delta (2cm) and Delta (6cm)
absolute value(Delta (2cm) – Delta (6cm)) < 1.5 mm.

6.5 Perform the procedure using contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ) and cassette with screen.

6.5.1 Be sure to be familiar with the advance preparation and information given in section 5 before pro-
ceeding. Also, be sure to prepare the Senographe DMR by following sections 6.1 and 6.2 before
proceeding.

6.5.2 Starting from application mode, select


SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/CALIB/PM_yld on the console,
where x is the screen pair being calibrated. This sets up the calibration for the cassette with screen
procedure.

6.5.3 Install the loaded cassette (with screen).

BE VERY SURE THAT THE CASSETTE WITH SCREEN IS INSTALLED


WARNING BECAUSE THE CHECK IN SECTION 6.6 WILL NOT SHOW AN ERROR
DUE TO A MISTAKE HERE.

3–40
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 11 of 20

6.5.4 Put 2 cm of plexiglass on the cassette holder.

6.5.5 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass.

6.5.6 Select CALIB/CALIB/THICK/2 cm on the console. This tells the software the amount of plexi-
glass present.

6.5.7 Select SETUP/CALIB on the console.

6.5.8 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A series of X–ray exposures is taken (at least 25).

6.5.9 When the series of exposures is complete, the message ”thick calib end” appears on the console dis-
play. At this point, release the 2nd trigger button.

6.5.10 Raise the compression paddle and increase the amount of plexiglass to 4 cm. Select SETUP/
THICK/4 cm on the console.

JOB CARDS
6.5.11 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass. Repeat sections 6.5.7 to 6.5.9.

6.5.12 Raise the compression paddle and increase the amount of plexiglass to 6 cm. Select SETUP/
THICK/6 cm on the console.

6.5.13 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass. Repeat sections 6.5.7 to 6.5.9.

6.5.14 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console. This executes the calculation of the 6 coefficients
(A0, A1, A2, B0, B1, and B2) for each of 5 track/filter combinations. The message PM_yld cal end
appears on the console display.

6.5.15 Proceed immediately to section 6.6 to check calibration accuracy.

6.6 Check the contact mode with grid (bucky 18 x 24 ) and cassette with screen calibration accuracy.

Note: This check must always be made immediately after performing the calibration procedure in sec-
tion 6.5.

6.6.1 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. Display of Parameters Fol-
lowing an Exposure in chapter 1, section 3–10–2.

6.6.2 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated. (From application mode, select SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/YES on the console.)

6.6.3 Perform a CKSUM and go to application mode.

6.6.4 Select the screen pair being calibrated and verify that its name is as entered in Job Card IST 006
SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION

6.6.5 Set up the Senographe DMR in the configuration given in section 6.2.1.

3–41
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 12 of 20

6.6.6 Install the loaded cassette (with screen).

6.6.7 Put 6 cm of plexiglass on the cassette holder.

6.6.8 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass.

6.6.9 Set up the following exposure:


Mode: AEC (1–point)
Screen pair: Select the name of the screen pair being calibrated
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO; Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
Collimation: MAXIMAL SIZE
JOB CARDS

6.6.10 Take a short exposure. It is not necessary for the exposure to be complete, so the 2nd trigger button
can be released as soon as X–rays are being produced.

Note: Even if exposure is aborted due to insufficient available mAs, the thickness displayed on the con-
sole is useable. It is NOT USEFUL to wait for the tube to cool and repeat the exposure.

6.6.11 Note in the Job Card IST043 (IST007 data section) the thickness displayed on the console after the
exposure. It must be equal to the plexiglass thickness ±2 mm.

6.6.12 Repeat sections 6.6.8 to 6.6.11 using 4 cm and 2 cm of plexiglass.

6.6.13 If the displayed thickness is outside the tolerance given in section 6.6.11, first check that the correct
screen pair was selected in section 6.6.9. Otherwise, the corresponding calibration procedure (con-
tact mode with grid and cassette with screen, section 6.5) was probably done incorrectly. That pro-
cedure, as well as this check procedure immediately following it, would have to be repeated (this
can be done independently of the other procedures in this Job Card).

Note: See formula in Job card IST043 (IST007 data):


Delta (4cm) must be greater than Delta (2cm) and Delta (6cm)
absolute value(Delta (2cm) – Delta (6cm)) < 1.5 mm.

6.7 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the procedure using magnification mode without grid.
Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:
D 18 x 24 cm compression paddle installed .
D Magnification device installed (always in the bottom holes)

Note: Magnification of 1.5 if the SID = 660 and Magnification of 1.4 if the SID = 610
D Cassette holder 18 x 24 in place ( no grid ).
D SID as indicated in section 6.1.2
D Perform all the magnification calibration (with and without screen) in maximal collimation size.
At each time you move the magnification plate, the collimation is set by default in minimal size 9x9.

3–42
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 13 of 20

6.8 Perform the procedure using magnification mode without grid (cassette holder 18 x 24 ) and cassette
without screen.

6.8.1 Be sure to be familiar with the advance preparation and information given in section 5 before pro-
ceeding, especially the information concerning the use, if permitted, of the screen–less cassette sim-
ulation tool. Also, be sure to prepare the Senographe DMR by following sections 6.1 and 6.7 before
proceeding.

6.8.2 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/


FSC=x on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen
pair being calibrated. See Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGU-
RATION

6.8.3 Select CALIB/PM_YLD/GRID/NO on the console. This sets up the calibration for the without
grid procedure.

JOB CARDS
6.8.4 Select SETUP/SCREEN/NO on the console. This sets up the calibration for the cassette without
screen procedure.

6.8.5 Install the loaded cassette (without screen).

BE VERY SURE THAT THE CASSETTE WITHOUT SCREEN IS


WARNING INSTALLED BECAUSE THE CHECK IN SECTION 6.9 WILL NOT
SHOW AN ERROR DUE TO A MISTAKE HERE.

6.8.6 Put 2 cm of plexiglass on the magnification device.

6.8.7 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass.

6.8.8 Check for maximal collimation size.

6.8.9 Select SETUP/CALIB/CALIB/THICK/2 cm on the console. This tells the software the amount
of plexiglass present.

6.8.10 Select SETUP/CALIB on the console.

6.8.11 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A series of X–ray exposures is taken (at least 25).

Note: The small focus is automatically selected during this calibration.

6.8.12 When the series of exposures is complete, the message ”thick calib end” appears on the console dis-
play. At this point, release the 2nd trigger button.

6.8.13 Raise the compression paddle and increase the amount of plexiglass to 40 mm. Select SETUP/
THICK/4 cm on the console.

6.8.14 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass. Repeat sections 6.8.10 to 6.8.12.

6.8.15 Raise the compression paddle and increase the amount of plexiglass to 6 cm. Select SETUP/
THICK/6 cm on the console.

3–43
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 14 of 20

6.8.16 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass. Repeat sections 6.8.10 to 6.8.12.

6.8.17 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console. This executes the calculation of the 6 coefficients
(A0, A1, A2, B0, B1, and B2) for each of 5 track/filter combinations. The message PM_yld cal end
appears on the console display.

6.8.18 Proceed immediately to section 6.9 to check calibration accuracy.

6.9 Check the magnification mode without grid (cassette holder 18 x 24 ) and cassette without screen calibra-
tion accuracy.

Note: This check must always be made immediately after performing the calibration procedure in sec-
tion 6.8.

6.9.1 Copy the without screen parameters for the screen pair being calibrated to the with screen parameter
location of an unused screen pair (generally E) by following this procedure:
JOB CARDS

– Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/


FILM/COPY/SOURCE/SCREEN/NO on the console.
– Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=x, where x is the screen pair indicator corresponding to the
screen pair being calibrated.
– Select SETUP/SETUP/TARG/SCREEN/YES.
– Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=y, where y is the indicator of the unused screen pair.

Be very sure of the choice of unused screen pair indicator y (A, B, C, D or E).
CAUTION If a mistake is made, there is a risk of erasing good parameter values on
another screen pair that is in use.

– Once you are SURE that the screen pair indicator y is correct (see CAUTION above),
copy the parameters by selecting SETUP/SETUP/COPY/VALID. The message
COPY EXECUTED appears on the console display.

6.9.2 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. See Display of Parameters
Following an Exposure in chapter 1, section 3–10–2

6.9.3 Perform a CKSUM and go to application mode.

6.9.4 Set up the Senographe DMR in the configuration given in section 6.7.

6.9.5 Install the loaded cassette (without screen).

6.9.6 Put 6 cm of plexiglass on the magnification device.

6.9.7 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass.

3–44
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 15 of 20

6.9.8 Set up the following exposure:


Mode: AEC (1–point)
Screen pair: y (this is the indicator of the unused screen pair chosen in section 6.9.1)
Focal spot: SMALL (IMPORTANT for thickness accuracy)
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
Collimation: maximal size.

6.9.9 Take a short exposure. It is not necessary for the exposure to be complete, so the 2nd trigger button
can be released as soon as X–rays are being produced.

Note: Even if exposure is aborted due to insufficient available mAs, the thickness displayed on the con-

JOB CARDS
sole is useable. It is NOT USEFUL to wait for the tube to cool and repeat the exposure.

6.9.10 Note in the Job Card IST043 (IST007 data section) the thickness displayed on the console after the
exposure. It must be equal to the plexiglass thickness ±2 mm.

6.9.11 Repeat sections 6.9.7 to 6.9.10 using 4 cm and 2 cm of plexiglass.

6.9.12 If the displayed thickness is outside the tolerance given in section 6.9.10, first check that the correct
screen pair was selected in section 6.9.8. Otherwise, the corresponding calibration procedure (1.5
magnification mode without grid and cassette without screen, section 6.8) was probably done incor-
rectly. That procedure, as well as this check procedure immediately following it, would have to be
repeated (this can be done independently of the contact mode procedures in this Job Card).

Note: See formula in Job card IST043 (IST007 data):


Delta (4cm) must be greater than Delta (2cm) and Delta (6cm)
absolute value(Delta (2cm) – Delta (6cm)) < 1.5 mm.

6.10 Perform the procedure using magnification mode without grid (cassette holder 18 x 24 ) and cassette with
screen.

6.10.1 Be sure to be familiar with the advance preparation and information given in section 5 before pro-
ceeding. Also, be sure to prepare the Senographe DMR by following sections 6.1 and 6.7 before
proceeding.

6.10.2 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/


FSC=x on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen
pair being calibrated. See Job Card IST 006 SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGU-
RATION

6.10.3 Select CALIB/PM_YLD/GRID/NO on the console. This sets up the calibration for the without
grid procedure.

3–45
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 16 of 20

6.10.4 Install the loaded cassette (with screen).

BE VERY SURE THAT THE CASSETTE WITH SCREEN IS INSTALLED


WARNING BECAUSE THE CHECK IN SECTION 6.11 WILL NOT SHOW AN
ERROR DUE TO A MISTAKE HERE.

6.10.5 Put 2 cm of plexiglass on the magnification device.

6.10.6 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass.

6.10.7 Check for maximal collimation size.

6.10.8 Select SETUP/CALIB/CALIB/THICK/2 cm on the console. This tells the software the amount
of plexiglass present.
JOB CARDS

6.10.9 Select SETUP/CALIB on the console.

6.10.10 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A series of X–ray exposures is taken (at least 25).

Note: The small focus is automatically selected during this calibration.

6.10.11 When the series of exposures is complete, the message ”thick calib end” appears on the console dis-
play. At this point, release the 2nd trigger button.

6.10.12 Raise the compression paddle and increase the amount of plexiglass to 4 cm. Select SETUP/
THICK/4 cm on the console.

6.10.13 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass. Repeat sections 6.10.9 to 6.10.11.

6.10.14 Raise the compression paddle and increase the amount of plexiglass to 6 cm. Select SETUP/
THICK/6 cm on the console.

6.10.15 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass. Repeat sections 6.10.9 to 6.10.11.

6.10.16 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console. This executes the calculation of the 6 coefficients
(A0, A1, A2, B0, B1, and B2) for each of 5 track/filter combinations. The message PM_yld cal end
appears on the console display.

6.10.17 Proceed immediately to section 6.11 to check calibration accuracy.

6.11 Check the magnification mode without grid (cassette holder 18 x 24 ) and cassette with screen calibration
accuracy.

Note: This check must always be made immediately after performing the calibration procedure in sec-
tion 6.10.

6.11.1 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. See Display of Parameters
Following an Exposure in chapter 1, section 3–10–2.

3–46
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 17 of 20

6.11.2 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated. (From application mode, select SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/YES on the console.)

6.11.3 Perform a CKSUM and go to application mode.

6.11.4 Select the screen pair being calibrated and verify that its name is as entered in Job Card IST 006
SCREEN PAIR SELECTION AND CONFIGURATION

6.11.5 Set up the Senographe DMR in the configuration given in section 6.7.

6.11.6 Install the loaded cassette (with screen).

6.11.7 Put 6 cm of plexiglass on the magnification device.

6.11.8 Lower the compression paddle onto the plexiglass.

JOB CARDS
6.11.9 Set up the following exposure:
Mode: AEC (1–point)
Screen pair: Select the name of the screen pair being calibrated
Focal spot: SMALL (IMPORTANT for thickness accuracy)
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
Collimation: maximal size.

6.11.10 Take a short exposure. It is not necessary for the exposure to be complete, so the 2nd trigger button
can be released as soon as X–rays are being produced.

Note: Even if exposure is aborted due to insufficient available mAs, the thickness displayed on the con-
sole is useable. It is NOT USEFUL to wait for the tube to cool and repeat the exposure.

6.11.11 Note in Job Card IST043 the thickness displayed on the console after the exposure. It must be equal
to the plexiglass thickness ±2 mm.

6.11.12 Repeat sections 6.11.8 to 6.11.11 using 4 cm and 2 cm of plexiglass.

3–47
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 18 of 20

6.11.13 If the displayed thickness is outside the tolerance given in section 6.11.11, first check that the correct
screen pair was selected in section 6.11.9. – otherwise, the corresponding calibration procedure (1.5
magnification mode without grid and cassette with-screen, section 6.10) was probably done incor-
rectly. That procedure, as well as this check procedure immediately following it, will have to be
repeated (it can be done independently of the other procedures in this Job Card).

Note: See formula in Job card IST043 (IST007 data):


Delta (4cm) must be greater than Delta (2cm) and Delta (6cm)
absolute value(Delta (2cm) – Delta (6cm)) < 1.5 mm.

6.11.14 It is ESSENTIAL to disable the UNUSED screen pair y that was used to test the without-screen
parameters (from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/
ALGO/FSC=y/VALID/NO).

6.11.15 If necessary, disable use of the screen pair being calibrated (from application mode, select SETUP/
JOB CARDS

GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO, but see CAUTION in section


3.)

SECTION 7
CALIBRATING THE 5TH COUPLE (ONLY)
Perform this calibration only when you need to calibrate the 5th couple.
Presuming that the last free couple is E the procedure is as shown below.

7.1 Perform the no-screen/contact-mode calibration (similar to the procedure in Section 6.3)

7.2 Copy E no-screen to E with-screen and test (similar to the procedure in Section 6.4)

7.3 Repeat 7.1 and 7.2 in magnification-mode (similar to the procedure in Sections 6.8 & 6.9)

7.4 Perform the with-screen/contact-mode calibration and test (similar to the procedure in Section 6.6 & 6.5)

7.5 Repeat 7.4 in magnification-mode and test (similar to the procedure in Section 6.10 & 6.11).

Note: The above method could be applied to all couples, but is more time-consuming.

SECTION 8
COPY OF PARAMETERS FOR ANOTHER FILM/SCREEN COMBINATION

Perform this procedure VERY CAREFULLY and EXACTLY as given


CAUTION below. Failure to copy the parameters correctly could ruin the calibration of
existing calibrated screen pairs.

3–48
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 19 of 20

1. Starting from application mode, select (see illustration 1–10)


SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/COPY/SOURCE/SCREEN/NO on the console.

2. Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=x, where x is the screen pair indicator corresponding to an existing calibrated
screen pair using the same cassette as the screen pair currently being calibrated.

3. Select SETUP/SETUP/TARG/SCREEN/NO.

4. Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=y, where y is the indicator of the screen pair being calibrated.

5. Once you are SURE that the screen pair indicator y is correct, copy the without screen parameters by select-
ing SETUP/SETUP/COPY/VALID. The message COPY EXECUTED appears on the console display.

6. Select SETUP/SOURCE/SCREEN/YES on the console.

JOB CARDS
7. Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=x, where x is the screen pair indicator corresponding to an existing calibrated
screen pair using the same cassette as the screen pair currently being calibrated.

8. Select SETUP/SETUP/TARGET/SCREEN/YES.

9. Select SETUP/FSC/FSC=y, where y is the indicator of the screen pair being calibrated.

10. Once you are SURE that the screen pair indicator y is correct, copy the with screen parameters by selecting
SETUP/SETUP/COPY/VALID. The message COPY EXECUTED appears on the console display.

3–49
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTO-CELL GAIN FOR A


GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 007 20 of 20

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–50
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 008 1 of 4

Purpose: UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT Version No.:


Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ratchet wrench with 22 mm socket
D 6 mm Allen wrench

JOB CARDS
D Claw hammer or other suitable tool for removing packing nails

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D Follow standard safety practices for handling and moving large machines.

CAUTION Never lift or move the gantry by its handles.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None

3–51
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT


Job Card IST 008 2 of 4

SECTION 5
UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT
The objective is to unpack the gantry, generator and accessories and move them to the mammography room.

5.1 Inspect for damage and perform initial unpacking.


The Senographe DMR was completely inspected for proper operation and appearance before shipment. How-
ever, it is necessary to inspect the product after the shipment is received. Visually inspect the packages for any
apparent damage. If there are signs of damage, refer to the Damage in Transportation statement in the front
of this manual.
Open the packages and refer to the Product Delivery Instructions (PDI). Verify that items on the list are present
in the package. Carefully examine the contents for small parts.

5.2 Perform initial unpacking.


JOB CARDS

5.2.1 Remove the outer cardboard covering from the crate.

5.2.2 Remove ramp from crate and put it in place.

5.2.3 Remove the protective screen and the other accessories from the crate and move them into the mam-
mography room.

5.3 Unpack gantry.

5.3.1 Use the 6 mm Allen wrench to remove the four gantry baseplate shipping hold–down screws.

5.3.2 Thread the four special jacking bolts (provided in the accessory pouch) into their respective holes
in the gantry baseplate. Place the four flat round jack feet (provided in the accessory pouch) on the
floor of the crate with their nipples facing upwards. Continue turning the jacking bolts downwards
until their hollowed ends engage with the nipples of the jack feet.

5.3.3 Use the ratchet wrench with a 22 mm socket to progressively jack the gantry up via the four jacking
bolts.

5.3.4 When gantry baseplate is high enough to be clear of the wooden support blocks, remove these
blocks.

5.3.5 Lower the gantry progressively via the four jacking bolts until it is fully supported by the castors.

5.3.6 Leave the four special jacking bolts threaded into the gantry baseplate and keep the jack feet aside
(the jack feet will be used again when installing the gantry).

3–52
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT


Job Card IST 008 3 of 4

5.3.7 Carefully roll the gantry down the ramp and into the mammography room.

CAUTION Never lift or move the gantry by its handles.

5.4 Unpack generator.

5.4.1 Remove the supports from the generator cabinet.

5.4.2 Carefully roll the generator down the ramp and into the mammography room.

JOB CARDS

3–53
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT


Job Card IST 008 4 of 4

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–54
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 009 1 of 2

Purpose: PHYSICAL INSTALLATION Version No.:


Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ratchet wrench with 22 mm socket
D 8 mm Allen wrench

JOB CARDS
D Drill
D Screwdrivers

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D Follow standard safety practices for handling and moving large machines.

CAUTION Never lift or move the gantry by its handles.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 008 ”UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT”

SECTION 5
PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
The objective is to place and anchor physically the gantry in its permanent position, and to assemble the protec-
tive screen.

Note: The generator is not permanently installed in this Job Card because it must remain mobile until
the wiring between it and the gantry is complete (Job Card IST 010 ”WIRING”). The generator
must therefore remain on its castors for the moment.
The ”CE” marking label, located on one of the large side panels of the generator, must remain vis-
ible after installation of the generator.

3–55
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

PHYSICAL INSTALLATION
Job Card IST 009 2 of 2

5.1 Install and anchor the gantry into its permanent position.
D Before you proceed, it is recommended to perform a final verification of the information given in the Pre–
Installation Manual, particularly concerning clearances around the gantry when installed in its permanent
position.
D If no Stereotix 2 is to be installed, the anchoring is not mandatory, only recommended (except in seismic
area).

5.1.1 Place the drilling template (provided in the installation kit) flat on the floor, align it with the desired
permanent position and mark the three gantry mounting hole centers on the floor.

5.1.2 Drill the three gantry mounting holes (depth and diameter depend on the type of insert to be used
– see below).

5.1.3 Place the appropriate type of insert (not provided) into each of the three mounting holes (depending
JOB CARDS

on the type and thickness of floor). The inserts should be able to receive the 10 x 80 mm screws (pro-
vided), or, for U.S. installations, the closest U.S. equivalent (not provided).

5.1.4 Wheel the gantry so that its three baseplate mounting holes are aligned with the three holes drilled
in the floor.

5.1.5 Place the four flat round jack feet on the floor with their nipples facing upwards.

5.1.6 Turn the four jacking bolts downwards until their hollowed ends engage with the nipples of the four
jack feet.

5.1.7 Use the ratchet wrench with a 22 mm socket to progressively jack the gantry up via the four jacking
bolts until the castors are clear of the floor.

5.1.8 Use the 8 mm Allen wrench to remove the castors.

5.1.9 Lower the gantry progressively via the four jacking bolts until it is fully supported by its baseplate.
Remove the four jacking bolts completely.

Note: The four jack feet remain below the gantry baseplate. If the floor is not perfectly even, level the
DMR base using the 4 screws PN 45562657 (provided in installation kit). Insert them in place
of the jacking blots to push on the jack feet.

5.1.10 To provide access to all three gantry baseplate mounting holes (one of the holes is located inside
the gantry column), remove the two column side panels (see IST 032 if necessary).

5.1.11 Bolt the gantry to the floor with the three 10 x 80 mm diameter screws (provided) or, for U.S. instal-
lations, the closest U.S. equivalent (not provided).

5.1.12 Cover all unused gantry baseplate holes with the plastic plugs provided.

5.2 Assemble the protective screen.


See the mounting instructions delivered with the X–ray shield (one to three panels). Anchoring to the floor
is not mandatory (except in seismic areas).

3–56
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 010 1 of 12

Purpose: CONNECTING THE CABLES AND Version No.:


HV TANK CHECK Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Standard set of socket wrenches and nut drivers

JOB CARDS
D Standard set of open end wrenches
D HV grease: GE P/N C333633

SECTION 3
SPECIAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The chronological order given in Installation Steering in Chapter 1 must be followed.

3–57
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING THE CABLES AND


HV TANK CHECK Job Card IST 010 2 of 12

SECTION 5
CONNECTING THE CABLES
The objective is to connect the cables between the generator, gantry and console, and to connect, if used, the
X-ray lamp, room-lamp and room-door wires to the generator.
The AC supply cable is not connected in this Job Card - that operation is performed in IST 011.

Note: If applicable and for convenience and tidiness, excessive cable length can be stored in a coil (with
a maximum diameter of 350mm) in the enclosed space underneath the generator (there is a recess
in the botom of one of the side panels that allows the cable to pass under the panel).
ILLUSTRATION 1
COILING AND STORING EXCESS CABLE
JOB CARDS

Generator cabinet

350mm maximum

5.1 Routing and connecting the cable loom to the generator


The cables are already connected to the gantry - it is only necessary to route and connect them to the generator.
Do not cable-tie the cables until they have all been routed and connected.
1. Determine the normal working positions of the gantry and the generator and position them there.

2. Remove the cable harness from the gantry and, as appropriate, either lay the cables in the floor or wall duct-
ing, or coil excessive cable length and store it under the generator (see Illustration 1).

3. Undo the four screws on the top cover of the generator cabinet and lift off the cover.

4. Lift up and remove the generator’s end covers (item 1 in Illustration 1) and then the side covers.

5. Bolt the cable-support bracket to the lower cross-member of the chassis adjacent to the HV unit (see
Illustration 2).

6. Referring to Table 1, identify the cables in the harness and their termination details.

3–58
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING THE CABLES AND


HV TANK CHECK Job Card IST 010 3 of 12

ILLUSTRATION 2
LOCATION OF THE CABLE-SUPPORT BRACKET

Bracket mounting screws


(screwed in place for
shipment)

Mounting bracket

JOB CARDS
TABLE 1
CABLE AND TERMINATION IDENTIFICATION

Shown on
Cable Colour Connects to Illustration

Anode return (+HT) Black HV tank 3

HV cable Grey HV tank 3

Emergency stop Grey TB1 Auto–transformer 7

Gantry ground Green/yellow Grounding bar 4


200-PL2 :
Gantry DC supply Brown XJ6 (+VE) XJ7 (–VE) 4

400PL2: XJ6 through XJ9


Fiber-optic links Black and grey 5

Starter motor cable White 300PL2 XJ2∗ 6


∗ The screen of this cable is terminated with a metal grounding clip which must be securely
fixed with the screw pre-installed on the panel (see Illustration 6 for location).

3–59
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING THE CABLES AND


HV TANK CHECK Job Card IST 010 4 of 12

5.2 Connecting the HV cable


1. Remove the protective covering from the HV cable connector and apply HV grease to it.
2. Plug the HV cable into the HV unit and carefully tighten the connecting ring (item 2 in Illustration 3).
3. To ensure proper grounding of the HV cable, tighten the 1.5 mm screw on the top of the cable locking ring.

Note: If the HV cable is not properly grounded, then intermittent console lock-up and random error mes-
sages could occur – in such an event, check the grounding at both ends of the cable.
5.3 Connecting the anode return cable

1. Connect the X-ray tube anode return wire (marked BLOC +HT) to the threaded stud marked with a ground
symbol on the top of the HV unit (item 1 in Illustration 3).

Do not tighten the nut excessively – doing so may well damage the thread or
CAUTION break off the stud and in such an event the sealed HV unit would have to be
returned to the factory for repair.
JOB CARDS

ILLUSTRATION 3
HV TANK CONNECTIONS

TB1

2 200 PL4

3–60
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING THE CABLES AND


HV TANK CHECK Job Card IST 010 5 of 12

ILLUSTRATION 4
GANTRY DC SUPPLY AND GROUND CONNECTIONS

400 PL3

400 PL1 Capacitor


box
400 PL2

JOB CARDS
200 PL2
XJ6
XJ7

701 PL1
1
Power Power
Line Line
Filter Filter

ÅÅ
ÅÅ
5.4 Connecting the gantry power and grounding cables
1. Referring to Illustration 4, route the gantry 27v power cables to 200PL2: the +ve connector to XJ6, the
0v connector to XJ5 (cables are routed under the capacitor box, through the middle of the generator).

2. Route the green/yellow ground cable using the same way and connect it to the grounding bar (item 1 in
Illustration 4).

BE VERY CAREFUL: YOU CONNECT THE GANTRY CABLES TO XJ6


WARNING & 7 ON 200 PL2 AND NOT TO XJ6 & 7 ON 200 PL1 – THE 200PL1 CON-
NECTORS CARRY LINE LEVEL AC VOLTAGES WHICH, IF CON-
NECTED TO THE GANTRY, WILL CAUSE CONSIDERABLE DAMAGE
TO THE GANTRY COMPONENTS.

3–61
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING THE CABLES AND


HV TANK CHECK Job Card IST 010 6 of 12

ILLUSTRATION 5
FIBRE-OPTIC LINKS CONNECTION

400 PL3

XJ6
400 PL1 through
XJ9
400 PL2
Fibre-
optic
cables
JOB CARDS

200 PL2

701 PL1

Power Power
Line Line
Filter Filter

ÅÅ
ÅÅ
5.5 Connecting the fibre-optic cables

Fibre-optic cables are more fragile than ordinary coper-stranded cable and
CAUTION you must therefore treat them with greater care – bend or twist them only as
much as is strictly necesary to install and connect them.

1. Route the black plastic pipe protecting the fibre-optic cables as shown in Ilustration 5, taking care to keep
a smooth radius on all bends (fibers are routed under the capacitor box, through the middle of the genera-
tor).

2. Identify the four connectors XJ6 through XJ9 on the generator interface board 400PL2 and connect the four
fibre-optic cables to their respective connectors.

3–62
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING THE CABLES AND


HV TANK CHECK Job Card IST 010 7 of 12

ILLUSTRATION 6
ANODE STARTER MOTOR CABLE CONNECTION

Anode
starter 400 PL3
cable

400 PL1

400 PL2
Metal
grounding

JOB CARDS
clip here

200 PL2

701 PL1

Power
Line
Filter

ÅÅ
ÅÅ
5.6 Connecting the anode starter cable
1. Route the anode starter cable (marked 300 PL2 XJ2) as shown in Illustration 6 and connect it to XJ2 on
the anode starter board 300PL2.
2. Remove the metal grounding clip; pass the anode starter cable inside and bolt the metal grounding clip back
to the panel.

3–63
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING THE CABLES AND


HV TANK CHECK Job Card IST 010 8 of 12

5.7 Connecting the emergency stop cable


1. Route the emergency stop 2–wire cable (marked Auto–transformer TB1–200PL2 XJ10) as shown in
Illustration 7 and connect it to the orange connector TB1 (available for systems shipped after October,
2000) located on top of the Auto–transformer (TB1 location is shown on illustration 3).

Do not over tight – excessive tightening may well strip the thread in the sheet
CAUTION metal.

ILLUSTRATION 7
EMERGENCY STOP CABLE CONNECTION
JOB CARDS

400 PL3

400 PL1

400 PL2

Emergency
cable
200 PL2

XJ 10

701 PL1

Power
Line
Filter

3–64
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING THE CABLES AND


HV TANK CHECK Job Card IST 010 9 of 12

5.8 X-ray ON and room door wiring


Refer to IST042 for connecting the X-ray ON and room-door wiring.

5.9 Connecting the console cable.

1. Route console cable (provided in the accessory pouch) from console to generator.

Note: Console cable goes on the inside of the middle generator cross-member.

2. Locate connector XJ8 on generator command board 400PL1 and connect this cable to it.

3. Route and connect opposite end of console cable to the console.

CAUTION Tighten the connector retaining screws finger tight only at each end of con-
sole cable.

JOB CARDS
5.10 Connecting the compression footswitch cables (See illustration 8).

5.10.1 2–Pedal Footswitch basic hardware (Compression):

1. Remove gantry column left side cover to access 800 PL1 Gantry Power Board.

2. Route the two footswitch cables along gantry main harness (use ties).

3. Attach each footswitch cable to the Gantry chassis using a clamping plate (4),

4. Connect the two footswitch cables to the fixed connectors XJ10A and XJ10B on the Gantry
800PL1 Power Board (2).

5.10.2 4–Pedal Footswitch optional hardware (Compression + Elevator):

1. Remove gantry column left side cover to access 800 PL1 Gantry Power Board

2. Route the two footswitch cables along gantry main harness (use ties).

3. Attach each footswitch cable to the Gantry chassis using a clamping plate (4).

4. Connect the two compression footswitch cables to fixed connectors XJ10A and XJ10B on the
Gantry 800PL1 Power Board (2).

5. Connect the two elevator control footswitch cables to the “flying” connectors XJ13A and
XJ13B (3).

3–65
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING THE CABLES AND


HV TANK CHECK Job Card IST 010 10 of 12

ILLUSTRATION 8
FOOTSWITCH CABLE CONNECTION

     

 '+). (-!) ()

      





(,+! ((+*-$+#
JOB CARDS

%!* %('" +#!


&$' #)'!** 


 
 
 

 

       

 '+). (-!) ()

      





 



 


 


     


 

3–66
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING THE CABLES AND


HV TANK CHECK Job Card IST 010 11 of 12

5.11 Final cable dressing and tying


2. Secure the HV cable to the lower and middle cross-members with two cable-ties (one on each cross-mem-
ber).

3. Arrange the remaining cables, then attach them to the lower and middle cabinet cross-members with two
cable-ties (one on each cross-member).

Note: Secure the anode current return wire BLOC +HT to the lower cross-member only.
4. Secure the X-ray lamp and room lamp wires (if used) to the lower and middle cross-members with two
cable-ties (one on each cross-member).

5. Leaving sufficient slack to avoid stress on the fibre-optic connectors, attach the black plastic tubing to the
middle cross-member with a cable-tie.

JOB CARDS
6. Attach the two gantry power leads and the protective grounding cable to the lower cabinet cross-member
with a cable-tie.

3–67
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING THE CABLES AND


HV TANK CHECK Job Card IST 010 12 of 12

SECTION 6
HV TANK
1. In order to release pressure during long exposure loosen by 3mm the vent screw of the HV tank.

ILLUSTRATION 9
HV TANK

VENT SCREW
JOB CARDS

3–68
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 011 1 of 6

Purpose: CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY Version No.:


Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D AC voltmeter
D Torque wrench (optional)

JOB CARDS
Note: The recommended torque for all lug nuts is 4 Nm

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Follow standard safety techniques and procedures for handling equipment and circuits carrying AC supply
voltages.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
You must follow the chronological order given in Installation Steering in Chapter 1.

3–69
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY


Job Card IST 011 2 of 6

SECTION 5
CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY
The objective is to determine the nominal voltage and frequency of the available power source, configure the
DMR generator accordingly, and connect it to the AC supply.

5.1 Checking the nominal line voltage and frequency


Consult the user to determine the nominal line voltage and frequency, then measure the open-circuit line volt-
age to verify that it corresponds to that nominal line voltage ± 10%. Allowable nominal line voltages are 200,
208, 220, 240, 380, 415 V single-phase.

5.2 Positioning the voltage selection board


Referring to llustration 1 and Table 1, install the voltage selection board IN2 on the AC Distribution board
200-PL1 according to the nominal AC supply voltage.
JOB CARDS

5.3 Configuring the DMR according to the line frequency


The DMR operates with either a 50 or 60 Hz line frequency without adjustment.

5.4 Voltage selection


Referring to llustration 1, check the position of the wire SEL on the AC Distribution board 200-PL1 – it will
probably be connected to the 240v transformer tap. If this tap selection does not correspond to the nominal
(not the measured) line voltage you determined in section 5.1, then remove and reconnect the SEL wire to the
appropriate terminal.

Note: Do not make a connection to the 0V terminal for the SEL wire – the terminal is reserved exclu-
sively for performing the measurement in Job Card IST 012 and the DMR cannot function nor-
mally when the SEL wire is in this position.
TABLE 1
POSITION OF VOLTAGE SELECTION BOARDS IN2 AND SEL WIRE

Nominal single-phase Position of


line voltage Position of IN2 SEL wire
415V HT 415V
380V HT 380V
240V BT 240V
220V BT 220V
208V BT 208V
200V BT 200V

440V use transformer reference : 45563370


480V and 380V configuration

3–70
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY


Job Card IST 011 3 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 1
LOCATION OF VOLTAGE SELECTION BOARD IN2 AND SEL WIRE

JOB CARDS
SEL wire

HV tank 701

200 PL1

IN2 board
position

BT for <240v HT for >380v


AC input AC input

3–71
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY


Job Card IST 011 4 of 6

5.5 Configure fuses F1, F2.


To configure these fuses (see illustration 2 for location), follow the indications on the label located on the bot-
tom of the generator cabinet, just below the AC supply switch S1.

FOR SAFE OPERATION OF THE DMR, PAY PARTICULAR ATTEN-


WARNING TION TO THE INFORMATION ON THIS LABEL. DETERMINE WHE-
THER THE AC SUPPLY CONSISTS OF TWO PHASES OF A
THREE-PHASE SYSTEM, OR A SINGLE PHASE AND NEUTRAL.

WHEN THE SUPPLY IS SINGLE-PHASE WITH NEUTRAL, A METAL


CYLINDER (delivered with the DMR) MUST BE INSTALLED INSTEAD
OF F1.

ILLUSTRATION 2
LOCATION OF THE FUSES
JOB CARDS

3–72
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY


Job Card IST 011 5 of 6

5.6 Connecting the AC supply cable.

1. Verify that generator AC supply Switch 200-S1 is in the 0 position and that AC supply is OFF.

2. Connect the AC line and neutral wires to the L & N terminals and the ground wire to the yellow/green termi-
nal as shown in illustration 3.

3. Cable-tie the cable to the lower cross-member of the cabinet using the holes provided in the cross-member.

4. Route and connect the other end of the supply cable to the AC supply source.

ILLUSTRATION 3
CONNECTING THE AC SUPPLY CABLE
AC supply cable Tie up

JOB CARDS
200 PL1

HV tank
701

200 PL4

200 PL2

3–73
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CONNECTING TO THE AC SUPPLY


Job Card IST 011 6 of 6

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–74
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 012 1 of 4

Purpose: LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT Version No.:


Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D a.c. voltmeter with MIN and MAX VOLT readout

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION During the procedures in this Job Card, you will be in close proximity to cir-
cuits operating at line voltage – take appropriate precautions.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
You must follow the chronological order given in Installation Steering in Chapter 1.

Note: Make sure the console is connected to the Senographe generator.

3–75
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT


Job Card IST 012 2 of 4

SECTION 5
LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT
The objective is to determine the resistance at the line input to the Senographe generator cabinet. The result
of this measurement may have an impact on the maximum allowable generator power (which will be set in
a later procedure).

5.1 Preparation.

5.1.1 Switch off the Senographe and set the generator power switch 200–S1 to the 0 position.

5.1.2 Disconnect voltage selection wire SEL from its normal lug on the generator board 200–PL1, and
reconnect it to the 0V lug.
JOB CARDS

Note: The 0V position of the SEL wire is reserved exclusively for this line resistance measurement. The
Senographe cannot function normally when the SEL wire is in this position. Do not attempt to
switch on the Senographe at this point – follow the instructions below.

5.1.3 Connect the ac voltmeter to the input end of the supply filter and write down the value of the open-
circuit line voltage:
V1 = ......................................

3–76
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT


Job Card IST 012 3 of 4

5.2 Procedure.

5.2.1 Turn the AC supply on, set the generator switch 200–S1 to the 1 position.

Note: Read the next step completely before performing it because you will have only 3 seconds to read
the voltmeter (if you miss the reading you will have to wait about 15 minutes to re-take it).
Use MIN – MAX readout mode of your voltmeter.

5.2.2 While looking at the voltmeter, press the power on switch on the generator board 200–PL2. During
a period of three seconds, a resistive load (power resistors R1 and R4 on the generator board) will
be connected across the line input, causing a drop in the voltage reading on the voltmeter. Note and
write down this closed circuit voltage:
V2 = ....................................

Note: After this three-second period the red LED DE3 on the generator board will light, indicating that
heating of the resistive load prevents an immediate repeat reading. After about 15 minutes, the

JOB CARDS
LED will go out and the reading can be repeated if necessary.

5.2.3 Calculate line resistance RL according to the formula:


RL = [(V1 – V2)/V2]  RINT
where RINT, the internal resistive load, depends on the nominal mains voltage:
voltage (V) RINT (Ω)
200 11
208 11
220 11
240 11
380 44
415 44

5.2.4 Having determined the line resistance RL, find the maximum generator power from table 2.
Example: The calculated line resistance is 0.41W. Table 2 shows the highest generator power
that can be delivered with a line resistance of 0.41W and an AC supply of 240v. The
maximum allowable generator power is therefore 3.5 kW.

Note: The maximum allowable generator power will be set later.

3–77
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

LINE RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT


Job Card IST 012 4 of 4

TABLE 2
MAXIMUM GENERATOR POWER FOR GIVEN LINE RESISTANCE AND AC VOLTAGE

Maximum allowable generator power


Nominal AC voltage
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0
415V 1.43 1.31 1.19 1.07 0.95
380V 1.20 1.10 1.00 0.90 0.80
240V 0.48 0.44 0.40 0.36 0.32
220V 0.40 0.37 0.34 0.30 0.27
208V 0.36 0.33 0.30 0.27 0.24
200V 0.33 0.30 0.28 0.25 0.22
JOB CARDS

5.2.5 Turn off the Senographe.

5.2.6 Set the generator power switch to the 0 position and switch off the AC power.

5.2.7 Disconnect the line voltage selection wire SEL from the 0V lug on the generator board and recon-
nect it to the lug corresponding to the nominal (not measured) AC line voltage. Tighten the lug nuts
to a torque setting of 4Nm.

3–78
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 013 1 of 10

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE Version No.:


COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Normal cassette and a supply of unexposed films of type used in the screen pair being calibrated
D Sensitometer and densitometer.

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

NEVER leave the Senographe DMR unattended during calibration of a


CAUTION screen pair.

CAUTION These procedures produce X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
You must strictly follow the order of AEC calibration for each screen pair given in Installation Steering in
Chapter 1. In particular, the three film reciprocity law failure compensation parameters A0, A1 and A2 for the
screen pair being calibrated must be unknown. If they are known, it is useless to follow the procedures in this
Job Card (see AEC calibration sequence and “Recommendations for AEC/AOP calibration procedure”
given in Installation Steering of Chapter 1).

Note: In the case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for the explanation.

3–79
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE


COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 013 2 of 10

SECTION 5
PROCEDURE.

5.1 General instructions


D The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout the procedures in
this Job Card.
D When placing plexiglass on the cassette holder, the plexiglass must always overlap the front edge
(towards the patient) by about 10mm to ensure that the photo cell is fully covered.
D Whenever the optical density of a film is measured, the measurement is always relative to the film
base fog level (net density). Thus, you must null out the densitometer on the film base fog,(unex-
posed area of the film); then measure the Net density in the middle of the film.
D To avoid confusing results (for you and the software), take care to avoid putting the single-sided film
upside-down in the cassette.
JOB CARDS

D The minimum number of films to expose during this procedure is 9 films.

5.2 Perform a warm up of the X–Ray tube prior of the calibration.


– Set up the senographe DMR in the following configuration:
Mode: Manuel (2–point).
Bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid).
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 30 kV
mAs: 100 mAs
– Take the exposure

To avoid excessive X–Ray doses on the photo–cell tube, place an empty cas-
CAUTION sette on the top of the image receptor.

5.3 Calibration of X–Ray tube heater current

5.3.1 Perform the calibration procedure on the LF/RH focal size/track combination, then on the others
in any order (SF/RH, LF/MO, SF/MO).

5.3.2 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch
B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3).

Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

5.3.3 Select the following menu sequence on the console: SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/


TUBE/HEATER/focal size/track/CALIB

3–80
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE


COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 013 3 of 10

Note: /focal size/track/ must be LF/RH for the first combination performed.

To avoid excessive X-ray doses on the photo-cell tube, place an empty cassette
CAUTION on the top of the image receptor.

5.3.4 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. The messages EXPOSURE NO 1, EXPOSURE NO
2, EXPOSURE NO 3 and CALIBRATION END appear sequentially on the console display. The
software automatically performs the three exposures and the calculations.

Note: Calibration time varies according to tube temperature. The message TOO WARM appears on the
console display when tube temperature is excessive for taking the next exposure. It is not neces-
sary to hold the 2nd trigger button down while waiting for the tube to cool. However, do not exit
the calibration menu while waiting. As soon as the TOO WARM message disappears, continue
the calibration by pressing the 2nd trigger button and holding it down.

JOB CARDS
Note: In case of arcing, the software re–attempts the same exposure automatically.

Note: The calibration procedure includes an exposure at 40 kV. If for some reason this exposure is
impossible to perform (e.g. excessive arcing), tube warm–up may be necessary (see Job Card IST
020 AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP).

5.3.5 Repeat sections 5.3.3 to 5.3.4 for each of the remaining focal size/track combinations.

Note: This must be done only if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

5.4 Perform film reciprocity law failure compensation calibration.


There are two objectives:
1. Calibrate the Senographe DMR for correct film blackening when in AEC (1-point) or AOP (0-point) mode.
This is done in section 5.6.

2. Determine the film reciprocity law failure compensation parameters A0, A1 and A2 for the screen pair
being calibrated. These parameters are determined jointly by the screen pair and the characteristics of the
Senographe DMR product. This determination is done in section 5.7.

3–81
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE


COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 013 4 of 10

5.5 Calibrate X-ray tube heater current at 30 mA.

Note: This calibration does not depend on the screen pair being calibrated, and thus needs to be per-
formed only once for the first screen pair to be calibrated. For subsequent screen pairs, skip this
section and go directly to section 5.6.

Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/


FSC=x/CALIB/LNRT/HEATER/CALIB on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator
(A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (see Job Card IST 006). Press the 2nd trig-
ger button and hold it down. A series of 3 X-ray exposures is taken. Release the 2nd trigger button.

Note: This calibration does not depend on any particular configuration of the Senographe DMR, so it
can be performed without any particular attention paid to presence or absence of accessories such
as compression paddle, cassette, grid, etc.
JOB CARDS

5.6 Calibrate reciprocity law failure reference energy.

5.6.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. Verify the initial film reciprocity law failure com-
pensation parameters A0, A1 and A2 by rotating the kV dial through the three values. The initial
parameter values are given below:
A0init = +1.008E+0 (1.008)
A1init = +1.244E–1 (0.1244)
A2init = +2.277E–2 (0.02277)
If any of the parameter values are different from the initial values given above, correct them
manually by pressing the CHANGE key, then enter the correct value using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a
Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1). Once the value is entered and vali-
dated, press the SETUP key once to continue checking the remaining parameter values.

Note: With experience installing several Senographe DMRs, you may find sets of initial parameter val-
ues for certain screen pair types (i.e. high or low speed films, certain screen types) that result in
fewer films being used to complete this calibration.

5.6.2 Ask the doctor for the desired reference optical density (Target net density); generally
OD_R(Optical Density–Reference) is between 1.0 and 1.6.
Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/
FSC=x/CALIB/LNRT/REFEN/OD_ref/CHANGE on the console, where x is the screen pair
indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (see Job Card IST 006).

Enter the desired reference optical density by rotating the kV dial and using the NEXT and
VALID keys (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parameter Value or
Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1).

3–82
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE


COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 013 5 of 10

5.6.3 Perform a sensitometry test on the fresh film (unexposed film) being used with the screen pair being
calibrated.

5.6.4 Select SETUP/SETUP/SCALE on the console. Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_3 is dis-
played on the console screen. Select CHANGE on the console.

Enter the optical density from scale number 3 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.

5.6.5 Press the SETUP key on the console. Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_5 is displayed on the
console screen. Select CHANGE on the console.

Enter the optical density from scale number 5 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.

JOB CARDS
5.6.6 Repeat section 5.6.5 for OD_7, OD_9, OD_11, OD_13 and OD_15 from the sensitometry test.

Note: If the message “Scale error” is displayed, the entered values of optical density did not increase as
expected; repeat the test and check that the correct values have been entered.

5.6.7 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


– any compression paddle installed
– contact (no magnification)
– bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid)
– 40 mm plexiglass on the bucky

5.6.8 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated.

5.6.9 IF this is the FIRST exposure, select SETUP/SETUP/CALIB/CALIB on the console. For SUB-
SEQUENT exposures (if any) select only SETUP/CALIB on the console. Press the 2nd trigger
button and hold it down. A single X-ray exposure is taken. Release the 2nd trigger button.

Note: By default, the first exposure is taken at +7.000E+1 (70) mAs. For certain slower speed films, this
calibration can be done using fewer films if the initial mAs value is increased. To do this, prior
to pressing the 2nd trigger button, select SETUP/SETUP/MAS/CHANGE on the console and
enter the desired initial mAs value using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. Then
select SETUP/SETUP/CALIB/CALIB on the console and proceed with the exposure.

5.6.10 Develop the film and measure its optical density.

Note: The grid is not activated during this calibration mode exposure, so it is normal to see grid lines
on the developed film.

3–83
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE


COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 013 6 of 10

5.6.11 Select SETUP/OD_mea on the console. Use the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial to enter
the measured optical density value (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a
Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1.

5.6.12 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. At this point, either the
result is satisfactory, and the software displays CALIB END on the console display or, if another
exposure and re-calculation are necessary, the software displays ANOTHER FILM.
In the latter case, re-load the cassette with fresh film and repeat sections 5.6.8 to 5.6.12 without
manually changing the mAs value – the software will have calculated a new mAs value for this
exposure. Normally, no more than 2 or 3 films need to be used before CALIB END appears on the
console display to indicate a satisfactory result.

Note: It is useful to note the updated mAs value determined by the software before taking any subsequent
exposures. This can give you an idea of the initial mAs values needed for certain film types to
reduce the number of films needed during future Senographe DMR installations (see Note in sec-
JOB CARDS

tion 5.6.9).

5.7 Calibrate film reciprocity law failure compensation parameters.

5.7.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


– any compression paddle installed
– contact (no magnification)
– bucky 18 x 24 in place
– set the SID to that used by user, 610 mm or 660 mm (most common)

5.7.2 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/LNRT on the console.

Note: There is a delay of about 2 seconds between the moment when the LNRT key is pressed and the
appearance of the succeeding sub-menu titles. This is due to a calculation that the software per-
forms to determine, among other things, the plexiglass thickness necessary for the calibration.

5.7.3 Place the amount of plexiglass indicated on the console display on the bucky and install the cassette
loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated.

5.7.4 Press the CALIB button, then press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single X-ray exposure
is taken. Release the 2nd trigger button.

If a message “Cooling Tube” or “Cooling Gene” is displayed, wait for cooling.


CAUTION If the message “Pwr too high” is displayed, one or more of the exposure pa-
rameters was not correct. Verify the maximum power setting and repeat the
procedure.

Note: The exposure time can be very short (20 ms) or very long (9 s), so be sure to hold the 2nd trigger
button down constantly until the exposure is complete.

3–84
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE


COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 013 7 of 10

5.7.5 Develop the film and measure its optical density.

Note: The grid is not activated during this calibration mode exposure, so it is normal to see grid lines
on the developed film.

5.7.6 Select SETUP/OD_mea on the console. Use the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial to enter
the measured optical density value (see Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a
Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1.

5.7.7 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. At this point, either the
result is satisfactory, and the software displays CALIB END on the console display, or, if another
exposure and re-calculation is necessary, the software displays ANOTHER FILM.
In the latter case, press the SETUP key once and repeat sections 5.7.3 to 5.7.7. As many as 15 films
may have to be used before CALIB END appears on the console display following the calculation,
indicating a satisfactory result.

JOB CARDS
Note: Be sure to update the amount of plexiglass on the cassette holder (if necessary) according to the
indication on the console display.

5.7.8 Select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console and note down the three film reciprocity law fail-
ure compensation parameters A0, A1 and A2 by rotating the kV dial.

Note: Keep these three parameter values with the table in Installation Steering in Chapter 1, once you
have verified them in section 5.9 below. They can be used in the future to avoid repeating this Job
Card during installation of other Senographe DMRs with the same screen pair. The Installation
Steering section explains how to perform the calibration when these parameters are known.

5.8 Set manual density correction step size.

5.8.1 Ask the doctor for the desired manual density correction step size.
For example, if the step size is chosen to be +1.000E–1 (0.1), then, assuming that the reference opti-
cal density of 1.0, the available range of corrected optical density is from 0.5 to 1.5 in steps of 0.1
in both AEC and AOP application modes.

5.8.2 Select SETUP/SETUP/Energ/PARAM/D_STEP/CHANGE on the console. Use the NEXT and


VALID keys and the kV dial to enter the desired manual density correction step size value (see
Visual Display of Parameter Values and Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measure-
ment in Chapter 1).

Note: In case the message ”Invalid parameters” is displayed on the console:


– Check the results following paragraph 5.9 for verification.
– If the results are correct, continue the DMR calibration / installation. Otherwise restart the job
card IST013.

3–85
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE


COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 013 8 of 10

5.9 Check results.

5.9.1 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated by selecting SETUP/SETUP
/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/VALID/YES on the console.

5.9.2 Perform a CKSUM and go to application mode.

5.9.3 Set up the following exposure configuration:


– mode: AEC (1–point)
– screen pair: Select the name of the screen pair being calibrated
– focal spot: LARGE
– track: MO
– filter: MO
JOB CARDS

– manual density correction: +0.

5.9.4 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


– any compression paddle installed
– contact (no magnification)
– bucky 18 x 24 with grid in place
– set the SID to that used by user, 610 mm or the most common 660 mm

5.9.5 Take three exposures, using the screen pair being calibrated, with the following kV and plexiglass
thicknesses, measuring and noting down the optical density of the film, the mAs and the time ob-
tained in Job Card IST043, (IST013 data section) for each one:
– 28 kV with 40 mm of plexiglass
– 32 kV with 15 mm of plexiglass
– 28 kV with 55 mm of plexiglass

Note: Since these exposures are taken in application mode, the grid is activated during the exposures and
thus no grid lines should be visible on the developed films.
The optical density must not vary by more than 0.2 between any two of the three films. If it does,
the entire calibration must be repeated.

Do not, in any circumstances, attempt to manually adjust any of the parame-


CAUTION ters determined by the calibration procedures in this Job Card. If the optical
density is outside the tolerance defined above , then there is an error which
must be corrected by repeating the entire calibration. A satisfactory result
must be obtained before proceeding.

3–86
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE


COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 013 9 of 10

Once the variation in optical density between the three films is satisfactory, check that the optical
density of the 28kV/40 mm film is inside the tolerance of the reference optical density ±0.1 (the ref-
erence optical density was chosen in section 5.6.2).
If the optical density is outside this tolerance, the reference energy must be calibrated as indicated
in Job Card IST 014. To do this, perform the following sequence:

1. Perform the section entitled Perform calibration of reference energy in Job Card IST 014.

Note: The reference optical density must be re–entered following the menu sequence given in Job Card
IST 014.

Note: For the initial calibration attempt, do not use the default mAs value of +7.000E+1 (70). Instead,
use the mAs value obtained above from the 28 kV/40 mm check exposure.

2. Perform the section entitled Check results in Job Card IST 014.

JOB CARDS
5.9.6 If necessary, disable use of the screen pair being calibrated (from application mode, select SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO on the console – but see CAU-
TION in section 3).

3–87
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF FILM RECIPROCITY LAW FAILURE


COMPENSATION FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 013 10 of 10

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–88
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 014 1 of 8

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR Version No.:


A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Normal cassette and a supply of unexposed films of type used in the screen pair being calibrated

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Densitometer

JOB CARDS
D Sensitometer
D plexiglasss in thickness increments of 5 mm (minimum dimensions 200 x 200 mm to ensure complete
covering of the photo cell)

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

NEVER leave the Senographe DMR unattended during calibration of a


CAUTION screen pair.

CAUTION These procedures produce X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

Note: In the event of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for an explanation.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The chronological order of AEC calibration given in Installation Steering in chapter 1 must be strictly followed
for each screen pair.

This Job Card is used ONLY when the three reciprocity law failure
CAUTION compensation parameters given (A0, A1 and A2) have been entered manu-
ally as explained in Installation Steering in Chapter 1.

3–89
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR


A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 014 2 of 8

For this procedure, do not, under ANY CIRCONSTANCES, attempt to


CAUTION ”tweak” manually the GAMMA or ENR_R parameters determined by the
calibration procedures in this Job Card. If the calibration results are not sat-
isfactory, there is a reason which must be corrected; correct the problem and
repeat the entire calibration.

SECTION 5
PREPARATION

5.1 General Instructions


D The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout these procedures.
D When placing plexiglasss on the cassette holder, the plexiglasss must always overlap the front edge
(towards the patient) by about 10 mm to ensure that the photo cell is fully covered, and the plexiglasss
is set all the way to the rear of the image receptor.
JOB CARDS

D To avoid confusing results (for you and the software), take care to avoid putting the single-sided film
upside-down in the cassette.
D Whenever the optical density of a film is measured, the measurement is always relative to the film
base fog level (net density). Thus, you must null out the densitometer on the film base fog,(unex-
posed area of the film); then measure the net density in the middle of the film.

5.2 Prepare the senographe DMR for this calibration procedure

5.2.1 Calibration of heater current.


– Set up the senographe DMR in the following configuration:
Mode: Manuel (2–point).
Bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid).
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
HV: 28 kV
mAs: 100 mAs
– Take the exposure

To avoid excessive X–Ray doses on the photo–cell tube, place an empty cas-
CAUTION sette on the top of the image receptor.

D Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch B1 on genera-
tor CPU board 400–PL3.

Note: This is necessary only when the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

3–90
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR


A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 014 3 of 8

5.3 Perform calibration of reference energy.


The objective is to calibrate the Senographe DMR for correct film blackening when in AEC (1-point) or AOP
(0-point) mode.

5.3.1 Ask the doctor for the desired reference optical density OD_R (Optical Density–Reference, the
Target Net Density). This is generally between 1.0 and 1.6.

5.3.2 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/


FSC=x/CALIB/Energ/PARAM/OD_R/CHANGE on the console, where x is the screen pair
indicator (A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (see Job Card IST 006).

5.3.3 Enter the desired reference optical density by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the
kV dial, see ”visual display of parameters values” and ”modification of a parameter value or
entry of a measurement” in chapter 1.

JOB CARDS
5.3.4 Perform a sensitometry test on a fresh film (unexposed film) being used with the screen pair being
calibrated.

5.3.5 Select SETUP/SETUP/SCALE on the console.

5.3.6 Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_3 is displayed on the console screen.

5.3.7 Select CHANGE on the console.

5.3.8 Enter the optical density from scale number 3 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.

5.3.9 Press the SETUP key on the console.

5.3.10 Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_5 is displayed on the console screen.

5.3.11 Select CHANGE on the console.

5.3.12 Enter the optical density from scale number 5 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.

5.3.13 Repeat section 5.3.9 through 5.3.12 for OD_7, OD_9, OD_11, OD_13 and OD_15 from the sensi-
tometry test.

5.3.14 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/CONFIG/NORMAL on the console (this tells the software that
the calibration is being done for the normal, and not Stereotix 2, mode).

5.3.15 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


– any compression paddle installed
– contact (no magnification)
– bucky 18 x 24 wiht grid in place
– 40 mm plexiglasss on the bucky.
– set the SID to that used by user, 610 mm or the most common 660 mm.

3–91
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR


A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 014 4 of 8

5.3.16 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated.

5.3.17 For an initial calibration, use the default mAs value of +7.000E+1 (70) by selecting SETUP/
CALIB/CALIB on the console. For any subsequent re-calibration, follow the instructions given
for entering a mAs value other than the default value (see IST013 Section 5.6.9).

5.3.18 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single X–ray exposure is taken. Release the 2nd
trigger button.

5.3.19 Develop the film and measure its optical density (OD) (See section 5.1).
The measured OD should be greater than or equal to (OD_R – 0.2) but lower than (OD_R + 0.8),
where OD_R is the reference optical density chosen in section 5.3.1.
For example: If OD_R = 1.1 then the optical density must be between 0.9 and 1.9
Note: The grid is not activated during this calibration mode exposure, so it is normal to see grid lines
JOB CARDS

on the developed film.


If the measured value is in the required range, go to step 5.3.21 to enter the value into the DMR.

5.3.20 If the measured value is not in the required range, first change the mAs value and repeat the OD
measurement.
If the film is too dark (measured OD greater than OD_R + 0.8), the mAs must be reduced; if the
film is too light (measured OD less than OD_R – 0.2), the mAs must be increased.
Calculate the required change in mAs value as 8% for each 0.1 of OD variation required.
Note: The value of 8% is based on a film gamma of 3.
For example: with an OD_R of 1.1 and 70 mAs the OD = 1.6, which you want to reduce by 0.5;
then 8%  5 = 40%, and 40% of 70 mAs = 28 mAs.
 to decrease the OD by 0.5, you should enter a mAs value of (70 – 28) = 42 mAs.
Repeat the OD measurement with the calculated new mAs value, as follows:

1. Select SETUP/mAs on the console

2. Enter the new mAs value, using the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial
Note: Be careful not to press the SETUP key more than once after entering the mAs value – a second
press will cause the value to revert to the default of +7.000E+1 (70).

3. Reload the cassette and install it in the cassette holder

4. Select SETUP/CALIB on the console; repeat sections 5.3.18 and 5.3.19.

5.3.21 When the measured OD value is in the correct range, select SETUP/OD_MS; use the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial to enter the measured value into the DMR.

5.3.22 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation; Calcul Done appears
on the console display.

3–92
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR


A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 014 5 of 8

5.3.23 Note down the following information:


– Gamma value (select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM/GAMMA on the console)
Note: This is not the film gamma, but another intermediate value calculated for internal use by the
Senographe.
– The reference energy (select SETUP/ENR_R on the console)
– The reference optical density (select SETUP/OD_R on the console)
– The sensitometry scale densities (select SETUP/SCALE on the console and rotate the kV dial
to display the different values)

5.4 Set manual density correction step size.

5.4.1 Ask the doctor the desired manual density correction step size.
For example, if the step size is chosen to be +1.000E–1 (0.1), then assuming that the reference opti-

JOB CARDS
cal density is 1.0 the available range of corrected optical density is from 0.5 to 1.5 in steps of 0.1
in AEC and AOP Application Modes.

5.4.2 Select SETUP/D_STEP/CHANGE on the console.


Use the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial to enter the desired manual density correction step
size value.

5.5 Check Results

5.5.1 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated by selecting
SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/VALID/YES on the console.

5.5.2 Perform a ”CKSUM” and go to Application Mode.

5.5.3 Set up the following exposure configuration:


– Mode: AEC (1–Point).
– Screen pair: Select the name of the screen pair being calibrated.
– Focal spot: LARGE.
– Filter: MO.
– Manual density correction: +0.
– 28 kV.
– 4 cm plexiglass.

5.5.4 Keep the Senographe DMR in the same configuration as given in section 5.3.15.

5.5.5 Take an exposure, using the screen pair being calibrated, note down the resulting mAs value and
measure the optical density of the film.

Note: Since this exposure is taken in Application Mode, the grid is activated during the exposure and
thus no grid lines should be visible on the developed film.

3–93
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR


A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 014 6 of 8

5.5.6 The optical density of the film must not be outside the tolerance of the reference optical density ±0.1
(the reference optical density was chosen in section 5.3.1). If the optical density is within this toler-
ance, skip directly to section 5.5.8 below.

Note: The reference optical density chosen and entered in section 5.3.1 can no longer be displayed at
this point; it was erased and replaced by the default value when the DMR was returned to Applica-
tion Mode for these checks.

5.5.7 If the optical density of the film is outside this tolerance, repeat the calibration procedure, but use
the mAs value obtained from the check exposure taken in section 5.5.5. To do this, perform the fol-
lowing sequence:

1. Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/CALIB/Energ./
PARAM/OD_R/CHANGE on the console. Re-enter the desired reference optical density
by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
JOB CARDS

2. Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/CALIB/mAs on the console and enter the resulting mAs


value obtained from the check exposure taken in Section 5.5.5 by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial.

Note: If the measured optical density from the check exposure is greater (less) than the desired reference
density, it is preferable to use a mAs value slightly lower (higher) than the value obtained from
the check exposure.

Note: Be careful not to press the SETUP key more than one time after entering the mAs value. Doing
so would cause this value to revert to the default mAs value.

3. Repeat Sections 5.3.15 to 5.3.23, EXCEPT THAT in Section 5.3.17, IT WILL NOW ONLY BE
NECESSARY TO SELECT SETUP/CALIB AND NOT SETUP/CALIB/CALIB ON THE
CONSOLE.

Note: The greater the difference between the optical density measured during the CALIBRATION and
the desired reference density, the greater the final error in optical density when in automatic expo-
sure Application Mode.

4. Repeat all checks in Section 5.5.

5.5.8 If you have entered the parameters A0, A1, and A2 manually, make the following check (otherwise
go to Section 5.5.9).
Take two exposures using the screen pair being calibrated with the following kV and plexiglass
thickness, measuring and noting the optical density of the film, the mAs and the time obtained in
Job Card IST043 (IST014 data section) for each one:
– 32 kV with 1.5 cm of pexiglass.
– 28 kV with 5.5 cm of plexiglass.

3–94
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR


A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 014 7 of 8

Check the optical density value obtained previously with 4 cm, with 1.5 cm, and with 5.5 cm. It must
not vary by more than 0.2 between any two of the three films. If it does:

1. Check the reciprocity low failure compensation parameters A0, A1, and A2.
– If the parameters are not correct, re–enter them manually as explained in Chapter 1 of
the Installation Steering Guide, and perform this Job Card, IST 014, from the beginning.
– If the parameters are correct, check Job Card IST 007.
If Job Card IST 007 does not check correct, perform the entire Job Card IST 007 before
performing Job Card IST 014 again.

2. If all the previous checks are correct, check the automatic film processor by making several sen-
sitometry tests and comparing the results (see Job Card IST 034, Section 5.2).

3. If all the previous checks are correct, perform Job Card IST 013.

JOB CARDS
5.5.9 If necessary, disable use of the screen pair being calibrated (from Application Mode, select SETUP/
GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO on the console) (see CAU-
TION in Section 3).

5.5.10 Perform a ”CKSUM” and go to Application Mode.


Note: The strategy of AOP is automatically calculated at the end of this Job Card.
Note: To check this AOP strategy, see Job Card IST 039 ”MANUAL DETERMINATION OF AOP
STRATEGY FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR” Section 5.1.3, in function of the mAs value obtained
from the 28 kV/4 cm check exposure.

3–95
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY FOR


A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 014 8 of 8

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–96
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 015 1 of 2

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION ARM Version No.:


ANGULATION Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None.

SECTION 2
TOOLS
None.

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SPECIAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None (Calibration is performed on DMR console; no X–Ray required).

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None.

3–97
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION ARM AN-


GULATION Job Card IST 015 2 of 2

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION ARM ANGLE
Sign convention for DMR application:

– When the operator is looking at the tube head, sign ’–’ corresponds to clockwise rotation, sign ’+’ corresponds
to counter-clockwise rotation.

5.1 Perform the Calibration Procedure

5.1.1 Turn the compression arm clockwise until it reaches the mechanical stop.

5.1.2 Set MIN compression arm rotation value: SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/ANGLE/


CALIB/MIN.
If the message No sensor is displayed, check that the sensor has been correctly declared in config
JOB CARDS

Menu.

5.1.3 Turn the compression arm counterclockwise until it reaches the mechanical stop.

5.1.4 Set MAX compression arm rotation value: SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/ANGLE/


CALIB/MAX.

5.1.5 Perform calculation: SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/ANGLE/CALIB/CALCUL

5.1.6 Perform checksum: SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CKSUM


The message Calibration OK should be displayed. If the message Error Min > Max is displayed,
repeat the calibration; check that the rotation values have been set at the correct positions, and that
the angle sensor is correctly connected.

5.2 Check results.

5.2.1 Position the Compression Arm as follows: –177 degrees, 0 degrees, then +177 degrees,

5.2.2 Check that the displayed angle varies according to the Compression Arm position.

Note: Accuracy of display is 2 degrees.


It is normal not to display +180 degrees.

Note: In case of error during this calibration, see error code list for explanation.

3–98
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 016 1 of 4

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE mA Version No.:


MEASUREMENT Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Milliammeter

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SPECIAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None

3–99
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE mA


MEASUREMENT Job Card IST 016 2 of 4

SECTION 5
Calibration of XRT mA measurement
The objective is to determine the scale factor F/mA between the X–ray tube mA measurement input to the soft-
ware and the real X–ray tube mA value.
The default parameter value is F/mA = +1.000E+3 (1000) Hz/mA

DO NOT touch potentiometer P1 on generator kV/mA board 701–PL1 at any


CAUTION point in this Job Card.

5.1 Preparation

5.1.1 Turn off the Senographe DMR.


JOB CARDS

5.1.2 Remove strap between terminal lugs MES_M_NEG and MES_M_POS of generator kV/mA board
701–PL1.

5.1.3 Connect milliammeter between test points MES_M_NEG and MES_M_POS of generator kV/mA
board 701–PL1. Set the milliammeter to its 100 mA DC scale.

5.1.4 Turn on the Senographe DMR.

5.1.5 Change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on generator CPU board
400–PL3, see Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console in Chapter 1).

5.2 Perform the calibration procedure.

5.2.1 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/mA_meas/


CALIB/CALIB on the console. Press pushbutton SW2 on generator kV/mA board 701–PL1
and HOLD IT DOWN. Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter. While
still holding SW2 down, select MEASUR on the console (this request for a measurement of
X–ray tube current is needed by the calibration software, but the value displayed on the console
at this point is of no importance to the service engineer). Release pushbutton SW2.

5.2.2 Select SETUP/I_MEAS on the console. Enter the value of current (in milliamperes) read from the
milliammeter by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See Visual Display of
Parameter Values and Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in chapter 1.

Note: Only values between +4.000E+1 (40) and +6.000E+1 (60) mA are accepted by the calibration
software. An error message appears on the console display if a value outside of this range is
entered.

5.2.3 Select SETUP/CALCUL/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. If the calculated F/mA
value is between 850 and 1150 mA calib END appears on the console display – if it is not, then
an error message appears.

3–100
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE mA


MEASUREMENT Job Card IST 016 3 of 4

5.3 Check results.

5.3.1 Select SETUP/CALIB on the console. Press pushbutton SW2 on generator kV/mA board 701–PL1
and HOLD IT DOWN. Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter. While still
holding SW2 down, select MEASUR on the console. Verify that the measurement on the console
display now corresponds to the value read on the milliammeter ±400 µA ± milliammeter error.
Release pushbutton SW2. DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.

5.3.2 Change the milliammeter scale to 200 mA DC. Press pushbutton SW1 on generator kV/mA board
701–PL1 and HOLD IT DOWN. Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter.
(The current should be approximately 120 mA.) While still holding SW1 down, select MEASUR
on the console. Verify that the difference between the measurement on the console display and the
value read on the milliammeter is less than 2.4 mA. Release pushbutton SW1. DO NOT ENTER
THIS MEASURED VALUE.

JOB CARDS
5.3.3 Select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console and note down the displayed value of F/mA.

5.3.4 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode.

5.3.5 Turn off the Senographe DMR.

5.3.6 Disconnect the milliammeter and replace the strap between terminal lugs MES_M_NEG and
MES_M_POS of generator kV/mA board 701–PL1.

3–101
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE mA


MEASUREMENT Job Card IST 016 4 of 4

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–102
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 017 1 of 6

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR Version No.:


Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Non invasive: RMI 232 kVp–meter, calibrated with known calibration factors.
D or Invasive: Machlett Dynalyser III divider and Fluke multimeter.

JOB CARDS
Note: MQSA (US) regulation requires kVp accuracy better than 5%. It means that the tool used for the
following measurements should have an accuracy much better than 5%, and the kVp limit values
displayed by the tool should depend from its own accuracy. The table 1 is given below to detail
these limit values vs. tool accuracy.

Note: RMI 232 must be used with its calibration factors. If not its accuracy (when verified only) is not
sufficient (from 6.0% at 25 kVp to 4.5% at 40 kVp).

SECTION 3
SPECIAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION These procedures produce X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

Note: The Senographe DMR is calibrated at factory in accordance with MQSA requirements (5%).
Therefore, this Job Card should not be performed at the first installation of the system.
The following procedures must have been performed in the following order:
D Job Card IST 001
D Job Card IST 002
D Job Card IST 016

Recalibration of kV scale factor may require a re-calibration of IST07 for all


CAUTION film/screen couples previously adjusted.

3–103
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR


Job Card IST 017 2 of 6

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR
The objective is to determine the scale factor G and offset VOF between the X–ray tube kV command from
the software and the real kV value obtained.
DEFAULT PARAMETER VALUES ARE G = +6.554E+1 (65.54) and VOF = +0.000E+0 (0.0)

DO NOT touch potentiometer P1 on generator kV/mA board 701–PL1 at any


CAUTION point in this Job Card.

Since MQSA requirement is 5% accuracy, the operator should take into account the accuracy of the measure-
ment method himself to define the read values not to exceed. See Table 1 which gives the limit values for each
used tool.
JOB CARDS

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR

5.1.1 Non invasive measurement method.


– Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:
– no compression paddle.
– maximum magnification mode (the purpose here is simply to reduce the distance
between the kV peak meter and the X–ray source – see applicable documentation for
minimum acceptable distance from X–ray source, if any).
– set SID = 510 mm. It is then not possible to produce HV. (the purpose here is simply to
reduce the distance between the kV peak meter and the X–ray source.

– Place kV peak meter on the magnification device or cassette holder. Turn it on and set it to the
MO/MO position. Set the waveform selector to CP (constant potential).
– Use the Senographe DMR light centering device to center the kV peak meter target with the X–ray
zone.
– Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch
(switch B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3).

Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

5.1.2 Invasive measurement method.


– Connect the HV divider to the HV TANK of generator.
– Connect the multimeter to negative channel of HV divider.
– Set the multimeter in DC mode, adjust RANGE function to get a display with 3 decimal digits,
then select the MIN function with a response of 100 ms.

3–104
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR


Job Card IST 017 3 of 6

– For each displayed value on the multimeter, multiply it by 10 to get the kVp value (the divider
ratio is 10000 and the high voltage is expressed in kilo–volts).

5.2 Perform the calibration procedure.

5.2.1 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/KV/CALIB/1st pt/CALIB on the console.

Note: By default, the kV command value sent by the software for this 1st point is 25 kV.

5.2.2 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single 1–second exposure is taken. ”CALIBRA-
TION END” appears on the console display. Release the 2nd trigger button.
. If using a RMI 232, read the displayed value, correct it by the correction factor given in the cal-
ibration factor table and note down this result. The calibration factor table gives values by 1 kV
steps; for intermediate values, use a linear interpolation.

. If using the Divider and Multimeter, read the displayed value, multiply it by 10 and note down

JOB CARDS
this result.

Note: If for some reason, this exposure has to be repeated select SETUP/CALIB on the console before
pressing the 2nd trigger button again

5.2.3 Select SETUP/kV_M on the console. Enter the kV value read from the kV peak meter by using
the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See Visual Display of Parameter Values” and
Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement in Chapter 1.

5.2.4 Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the console.

Note: By default, the kV command value sent by the software for this 2nd point is 40 kV. Due to DMR
software, the Mo filter remains selected.

5.2.5 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single 1–second exposure is taken. ”CALIBRA-
TION END” appears on the console display. Release the 2nd trigger button.
. If using a RMI 232, read the displayed value, correct it by the correction factor given in the cal-
ibration factor table and note down this result. The calibration factor table gives values by 1 kV
steps; for intermediate values, use a linear interpolation.

. If using the Divider and Multimeter, read the displayed value, multiply it by 10 and note down
this result.

Note: If for some reason, this exposure has to be repeated select SETUP/CALIB on the console before
pressing the 2nd trigger button again.

3–105
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR


Job Card IST 017 4 of 6

5.2.6 Select SETUP/kV_M on the console. Enter the kV value read from the kV peak meter by using
the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See ”Visual Display of Parameter Values” and
”Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement” in chapter 1.

5.2.7 Select SETUP/SETUP/calcul/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. Normally, ”KV
CALIB END” appears on the console display. If ”OUT OF RANGE” appears on the console dis-
play, this indicates either faulty kV measurement(s) in the steps above, or a hardware failure.

5.3 Check results.

5.3.1 Leave the Senographe DMRsenographe in the same conditions as described in section 5.1 (with the
kVp meter or divider–multimeter in place), and select SETUP/1st pt/CALIB on the console.

5.3.2 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single 1-second exposure is taken. ”CALIBRA-
TION END” appears on the console display. Release the 2nd trigger button.
JOB CARDS

. If using a RMI 232, read the displayed value, correct it by the correction factor given in the cal-
ibration factor table and note down this result. The calibration factor table gives values by 1 kV
steps; for intermediate values, use a linear interpolation.

. If using the Divider and Multimeter, read the displayed value, multiply it by 10 and note down
this result.

CAUTION: DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.

5.3.3 The kV value read on the kV peak meter should be 25 kV ± 0.3 kV.

Note: The generator kVp accuracy is ± 1% (one per cent) when measured just after a calibration.

5.3.4 Select SETUP/SETUP/2nd pt/CALIB on the console.

5.3.5 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single 1–second exposure is taken. ”CALIBRA-
TION END” appears on the console display. Release the 2nd trigger button.
. If using a RMI 232, read the displayed value, correct it by the correction factor given in the cal-
ibration factor table and note down this result. The calibration factor table gives values by 1 kV
steps; for intermediate values, use a linear interpolation.

. If using the Divider and Multimeter, read the displayed value, multiply it by 10 and note down
this result.

CAUTION: DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE.

3–106
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR


Job Card IST 017 5 of 6

5.3.6 The measured value should be within limits which depend on the measurement tool, as given in
Table 1 below:

Measurement tool 25 kV 40 kV
Min. Limit Max. Limit Min. Limit Max. Limit
RMI 232 24.12 25.86 38.58 41.37
Dynalyser III + Fluke 87 24.02 25.96 38.43 41.54
Table 1

Note: The generator kVp accuracy is ± 1% (two per cent) when measured just after a calibration.

Note: If the need should arise to check this point in application mode, it is not possible to do so because
exposures at 40 kV are prohibited with the Mo filter in application mode.

JOB CARDS
5.3.7 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. Note down the displayed values of G and
VOF by rotating the kV dial.

5.3.8 Job Card IST 003 ”CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT” must be done
immediately following this Job Card, but if you are turning the machine back over to the user at this
point, switch off, then on again.

5.3.9 Perform calibration check of IST007 (section 6.6 only). If thickness accuracy is outside the toler-
ance, IST007 must be performed completely for all already adjusted film/screen couples.

5.3.10 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode.

3–107
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF KV SCALE FACTOR


Job Card IST 017 6 of 6

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–108
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 018 1 of 6

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN Version No.:


STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D The cassette that will be used by the doctor for Stereotix 2 mode

Note: Presence or absence of film in the cassette is of no importance in this Job Card.

SECTION 2
TOOLS

JOB CARDS
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 5 mm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 200 x 200 mm to ensure
complete covering of the photo cell)

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION These procedures produce X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

THE GANTRY MUST BE ANCHORED TO THE FLOOR WITH 3 BOLTS


WARNING WHEN A SENOGRAPHE DMR IS EQUIPPED WITH THE STEREOTIX
2 (see job card IST 009).

BECAUSE CASSETTES DO NOT ALWAYS EXHIBIT A CONSTANT


WARNING RADIOLOGICAL DENSITY ACROSS THEIR SURFACES, THE CAS-
SETTE USED IN THIS JOB CARD MUST ALSO BE USED IN JOB CARD
IST 019.

FURTHERMORE, THE DOCTOR MUST USE ONLY THIS CASSETTE


IN STEREOTIX 2 MODE, EVEN IF OTHER CASSETTE TYPES ARE
CALIBRATED FOR NON–STEREOTIX 2 USE. BE SURE TO INFORM
THE DOCTOR OF THIS CONSTRAINT.

3–109
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREO-


TIX 2 POSITIONS Job Card IST 018 2 of 6

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The Senographe DMR being installed must be equipped with the Stereotix 2 option that has been set up and
calibrated according to the Stereotix 2 Service Manual.
Also, Job Card IST 004 must have been performed before this Job Card.

Note: In case of error messages during this calibration, see IST 041 for explanations.

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL IN STEREOTIX 2 POSITIONS
The objective is to calibrate the photocell in its Stereotix 2 positions. Because of the different angles between
the tube housing and the photocell when in Stereotix 2 mode, the photocell does not receive the same dose of
radiation as it does when in non–Stereotix 2 mode.
JOB CARDS

Note: Since this calibration does not depend on a certain screen pair, it is not necessary to perform it each
time a new screen pair is introduced.

This Job Card consists of four interdependent calibration procedures which are performed in the following
order:
D Normal, which is done without the Stereotix 2 installed as a reference calibration for the following three
calibrations.
D Stereotix Left, which is done with the Stereotix 2 installed and the tube–carrying arm rotated to the right
side as viewed from the front of the gantry.
D Stereotix Center, which is done with the Stereotix 2 installed and the tube–carrying arm rotated to the
center.
D Stereotix Right, which is done with the Stereotix 2 installed and the tube–carrying arm rotated to the left
side as viewed from the front of the gantry.

THE FOUR PROCEDURES MENTIONED ABOVE MUST ALL BE PER-


WARNING FORMED WITH THE SAME AMOUNT OF PLEXIGLASS (IF ANY). IF
AT ANY POINT THE SOFTWARE ASKS FOR A CHANGE IN THE
AMOUNT OF PLEXIGLASS, THE SEQUENCE OF FOUR PROCE-
DURES MUST BE STARTED AGAIN USING THE NEW AMOUNT OF
PLEXIGLASS THROUGHOUT.

3–110
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREO-


TIX 2 POSITIONS Job Card IST 018 3 of 6

5.1 General instructions to be observed during all procedures in this Job Card

5.1.1 The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient: position1).

5.1.2 When placing plexiglass on the photocell or Stereotix 2 cassette holder, the plexiglass must always
overlap the front edge (towards the patient) by about 10 mm to ensure that the photocell is fully cov-
ered.

5.1.3 Error messages will appear on the console display when the tube–carrying arm position is not in
agreement with the position being calibrated.

5.2 Prepare the Senographe DMR for these procedures.


Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on gen-
erator CPU board 400–PL3, see Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the Console in
Chapter 1).

JOB CARDS
Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

5.3 Perform the normal calibration.

5.3.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


SID: 510 mm
No cassette holder / no bucky installed
No compression paddle
Magnification: 1.3 (install the magnification device in the middle hole).
Cassette centered laterally on magnification device, and flush with front edge of magnification
device (i.e. no overlap)

Note: Initially, do not put any plexiglass on the photocell. However, it may be necessary to add plexiglass
during these calibration procedures.

5.3.2 Rotate tube–carrying arm to its center (i.e. non–Stereotix 2) position.

5.3.3 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/CELL/


STER/CALIB/CELL/NORMAL/SETUP/CALIB on the console.

3–111
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREO-


TIX 2 POSITIONS Job Card IST 018 4 of 6

5.3.4 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. One or more X–ray exposures are taken. Either the
message ”CALIBRATION END” or a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appears
on the console display. In either case, release the second trigger button.
If a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appeared on the console display, select
SETUP/CALIB on the console and repeat the exposure after changing the amount of plexiglass
by an increment of 10 mm.
If the message ”CALIBRATION END” appeared on the console display, proceed directly to the
Stereotix Left calibration in section 5.4.

5.4 Perform the ”Stereotix left” calibration.

5.4.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


Stereotix 2 installed
SID: 510 mm
JOB CARDS

No Stereotix 2 compression paddle

5.4.2 Set the Stereotix 2 compression plate to its highest position. Set the needle holder to the center of
its lateral (x–axis) range and to the maximum depth (y–axis) range, i.e. as far as possible from the
patient.

5.4.3 Keep the same plexiglass thickness (if any) as used in Normal calibration section 5.3.

5.4.4 Select SETUP on the console.

5.4.5 Rotate tube–carrying arm to its left Stereotix position (i.e. to the right side as viewed from the front
of the gantry). NORMAL CELL ERR appears on the console display.

5.4.6 Select CELL/LEFT/SETUP/CALIB on the console. STEREO. LEFT appears on the console dis-
play.

5.4.7 Place cassette (without film) on right side of Stereotix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front
of the gantry.

5.4.8 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. One or more X–ray exposures are taken. Either the
message CALIBRATION END or a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appears
on the console display. In either case, release the second trigger button.
If a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appeared on the console display:
– Repeat the normal calibration in section 5.3 using the new amount of plexiglass (gener-
ally the thickness is changed in increments of 10 mm).
– Repeat this Stereotix left calibration using the same new amount of plexiglass.

3–112
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREO-


TIX 2 POSITIONS Job Card IST 018 5 of 6

– Continue repeating the above two steps (if necessary) until a satisfactory plexiglass
thickness is found for both procedures.
– Proceed to the Stereotix Center calibration in section 5.5 using the same new amount
of plexiglass.
If the message CALIBRATION END appeared on the console display, proceed directly to the Ster-
eotix Center calibration in section 5.5.

5.5 Perform the Stereotix center calibration.

5.5.1 Keep the Senographe DMR set up as outlined in sections 5.4.1 and 5.4.2.

5.5.2 Keep the same plexiglass thickness (if any) as used in Normal calibration section 5.3 and Stereotix
left calibration section 5.4.

5.5.3 Select SETUP on the console.

JOB CARDS
5.5.4 Rotate tube–carrying arm to its center (i.e. non–Stereotix 2) position. STER. LEFT ERR appears
on the console display.

5.5.5 Select CELL/CENT/SETUP/CALIB on the console. STEREO. CENTER appears on the console
display.

5.5.6 Move cassette to center of Stereotix 2 cassette holder.

5.5.7 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. One or more X–ray exposures are taken. Either the
message CALIBRATION END or a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appears
on the console display. In either case, release the second trigger button.
If a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appeared on the console display:
– Repeat the normal calibration in section 5.3 using the new amount of plexiglass (gener-
ally the thickness is changed in increments of 1 cm).
– Repeat the Stereotix left calibration in section 5.4 using the same new amount of plexi-
glass.
– Repeat this Stereotix center calibration using the same new amount of plexiglass.
– Continue repeating the above three steps (if necessary) until a satisfactory plexiglass
thickness is found for all three procedures.
– Proceed to the Stereotix Right calibration in section 5.6 using the same new amount of
plexiglass.

If the message CALIBRATION END appeared on the console display, proceed directly to the Ster-
eotix Right calibration in section 5.6.

3–113
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF PHOTOCELL IN STEREO-


TIX 2 POSITIONS Job Card IST 018 6 of 6

5.6 Perform the ”Stereotix right” calibration.

5.6.1 Keep the Senographe DMR set up as outlined in sections 5.4.1 and 5.4.2.

5.6.2 Keep the same plexiglass thickness (if any) as used in Normal calibration section 5.3, Stereotix left
calibration section 5.4 and Stereotix center calibration section 5.5.

5.6.3 Select SETUP on the console.

5.6.4 Rotate tube–carrying arm to its right Stereotix position (i.e. to the left side as viewed from the front
of the gantry). STER. CENT ERR appears on the console display.

5.6.5 Select CELL/RIGHT/SETUP/CALIB on the console. STEREO. RIGHT appears on the console
display.

5.6.6 Move cassette to left side of Stereotix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front of the gantry.
JOB CARDS

5.6.7 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. One or more X–ray exposures are taken. Either the
message CALIBRATION END or a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appears
on the console display. In either case, release the second trigger button.
If a message requesting a change in plexiglass thickness appeared on the console display:
– Repeat the Normal calibration in section 5.3 using the new amount of plexiglass (gener-
ally the thickness is changed in increments of 1 cm).
– Repeat the Stereotix left calibration in section 5.4 using the same new amount of plexi-
glass.
– Repeat the Stereotix center calibration in section 5.5 using the same new amount of
plexiglass.
– Repeat this Stereotix right calibration using the same new amount of plexiglass.
– Continue repeating the above four steps (if necessary) until a satisfactory plexiglass
thickness is found for all four procedures.
– Be sure to execute the calculation as described in the next paragraph as soon as all four
procedures are satisfactorily completed.

If the message CALIBRATION END appeared on the console display, execute the calculation by
selecting SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console.

5.6.8 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode. If you are handing the machine back to the user
at this point, switch the Senographe DMR off, then on again.

5.7 Check results


The results of this calibration are checked simultaneously with the results of the calibration in Job Card IST
019.

3–114
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 019 1 of 8

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN Version No.:


STEREOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D The cassette that will be used by the doctor for Stereotix 2 mode

Note: This MUST be the same cassette that was used in Job Card IST 018
D A supply of unexposed films of type used in the screen pair being calibrated

SECTION 2

JOB CARDS
TOOLS
D Densitometer
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 5 mm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 200 x 200 cm to ensure
complete coverage of the photocell)

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

NEVER leave the Senographe DMR unattended during calibration of a


CAUTION screen pair.

CAUTION These procedures produce X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

THE GANTRY MUST BE ANCHORED TO THE FLOOR WITH 3 BOLTS


WARNING WHEN A SENOGRAPHE DMR IS EQUIPPED WITH A STEREOTIX 2
(see job card IST 009).

3–115
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STE-


REOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 019 2 of 8

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
The Senographe DMR being installed must be equipped with the Stereotix 2 option that has been set up and
calibrated according to the Stereotix 2 Service Manual. The chronological order of AEC calibration given in
Installation Steering in chapter 1 must be strictly followed for each screen pair.
In case of Stereotix 2 add–on to an already–installed Senographe DMR, follow the instructions given in the
section entitled AEC Calibration Upon Stereotix 2 Add–on in Chapter 2.
SECTION 5
PREPARATION

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS:
D The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout the procedures in
this Job Card.
JOB CARDS

D When placing plexiglass on the Stereotix 2 cassette holder, the plexiglass must always overlap the front
edge (towards the patient) by about 1 cm to insure that the photo cell is fully covered.
D Whenever the optical density of a film is measured, the measurement is always relative to the film
base fog level (Net density). Thus, you must null out the densitometer on the film base fog (unex-
posed area of the film), then measure the net density in the middle of the film.
D When measuring optical density of a Stereotix 2 film, the point of measure must be at about 5 mm below
the horizontal reference line, and in line with the vertical reference line.

5.1 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on
generator CPU board 400–PL3, see ”Accessing the Generator or Gantry Installation Mode from the
Console” in chapter 1).

Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

5.2 Determine mAs value for initial calibration attempt.

5.2.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


– Non–Stereotix 2 mode
– Any compression paddle installed
– Contact (no magnification)
– bucky 18 x 24 in place (with grid)
– 4 cm plexiglass on the bucky
– SID = 660 mm

3–116
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STE-


REOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 019 3 of 8

5.2.2 Set up the following exposure configuration:


Mode: AEC (1–point)
Screen pair: Select the name of the screen pair being calibrated
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
Manual density correction: +0
HV: 28 kV

5.2.3 Load cassette with undeveloped film and install it in the cassette holder.

5.2.4 Take an exposure and note down resulting mAs value.

JOB CARDS
5.3 Perform calibration of reference energy in Stereotix 2 mode.
The objective is to calibrate the Senographe DMR for correct film blackening when in AEC (1–point) mode
with Stereotix 2.

5.3.1 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/


FSC=x/CALIB/Energ/CONFIG/STEREO on the console, where x is the screen pair indicator
(A,B,C,D,E) corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated (see Job Card IST 006). This tells
the software that the calibration is being done for the Stereotix 2 (and not normal) mode.

Do not go any higher in the menu tree structure than given in the various
CAUTION steps in this section. If, for any reason, you do go higher in the tree structure,
it is essential to go into the CONFIG/STEREO menu first to avoid acciden-
tally using the default NORMAL mode, before proceeding with the calibra-
tion.

5.3.2 Select SETUP/PARAM/OD_R/CHANGE on the console. Enter the desired reference optical
density by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial. See ”Visual Display of Param-
eter Values” and ”Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a Measurement” in chapter 1.

Note: Normally, this value should be the same as the value used for the non–Stereotix 2 calibration in
Job Card IST 014.

3–117
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STE-


REOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 019 4 of 8

5.3.3 Perform a sensitometry test on the film being used with the screen pair being calibrated.

5.3.4 Select SETUP/SETUP/SCALE on the console. Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_3 is dis-
played on the console screen. Select CHANGE on the console. Enter the optical density from scale
number 3 of the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.
See ”Visual Display of Parameter Values” and ”Modification of a Parameter Value or Entry of a
Measurement” in chapter 1.

5.3.5 Press the SETUP key on the console. Rotate the kV dial until the value OD_5 is displayed on the
console screen. Select CHANGE on the console. Enter the optical density from scale number 5 of
the sensitometry test by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.

5.3.6 Repeat section 5.3.5 for OD_7, OD_9, OD_11, OD_13 and OD_15 from the sensitometry test.

5.3.7 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


JOB CARDS

– SID = 510 mm
– No cassette holder / No bucky installed
– Stereotix 2 installed
– Tube–carrying arm in right Stereotix position (i.e. rotated to the left side as viewed
from the front of the gantry)
– Stereotix 2 compression paddle installed
– Stereotix 2 needle holder set to the center of its lateral (x–axis) range and to the maxi-
mum depth (y–axis) range, i.e. as far as possible from the patient
– 4 cm plexiglass on the Stereotix 2 cassette holder

Note: If the mAs value obtained at section 5.2.4 was under 40 mAs, use 5 cm plexiglass.
– Stereotix 2 compression paddle in contact with plexiglass

5.3.8 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated. Place
it on the left side of the Stereotix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front of the gantry.

5.3.9 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/CALIB/mAs on the console. For an initial calibration attempt,


take the mAs value obtained in section 5.2.4, DIVIDE IT BY 4, and enter the result by using the
NEXT and VALID keys. See ”Visual Display of Parameter Values” and ”Modification of a Parame-
ter Value or Entry of a Measurement” in chapter 1.

Note: Be careful not to press the SETUP key more than one time after entering the mAs value. Doing
so would cause this value to revert to the default mAs value of +7.000E+1 (70).

3–118
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STE-


REOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 019 5 of 8

5.3.10 Select SETUP/CALIB on the console.

5.3.11 Press the 2nd trigger button and hold it down. A single X–ray exposure is taken. Release the 2nd
trigger button.

5.3.12 Develop the film and measure its optical density according to the technique given at the beginning
of section 5.
If the optical density of the film is greater than or equal to (OD_R – 0.2), enter this value by
selecting SETUP/OD_MS and using the NEXT and VALID keys and the kV dial to enter the
measured optical density value, then skip directly to section below 5.3.13.
If the optical density of the film is less than (OD_R – 0.2), increase the mAs value by selecting
SETUP/mAs on the console, then entering the increased mAs value by using the NEXT and
VALID keys and the kV dial. Then re–load the cassette and place it on the left side of the Stereo-
tix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front of the gantry. Select SETUP/CALIB on the con-

JOB CARDS
sole and repeat sections 5.3.11 and 5.3.12.

Note: Be careful not to press the SETUP key more than one time after entering the mAs value. Doing
so would cause this value to revert to the default mAs value of +7.000E+1 (70).

5.3.13 Select SETUP/CALC/VALID on the console to execute the calculation. CALCUL DONE appears
on the console display.

5.3.14 Note down the following information:


– The gamma parameter (select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM/GAMMA on the console)

Note: This is NOT the film gamma, but another parameter that is calculated by the software.
– The reference energy (select SETUP/ENR_R on the console)

Do not, in any circumstances, attempt to adjust manually the GAMMA or


CAUTION ENR_R parameters determined by the calibration procedures in this Job
Card. If the calibration results are not satisfactory you must repeat the entire
calibration.

– The reference optical density (select SETUP/OD_R on the console)

3–119
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STE-


REOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 019 6 of 8

5.4 Check results.

5.4.1 If necessary, enable use of the screen pair being calibrated by selecting SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/
SETUP/VALID/YES on the console.

5.4.2 Perform a CKSUM and go to application mode.

5.4.3 Set up the following exposure configuration:


Mode: AEC (1–point)
Screen pair: Select the name of the screen pair being calibrated
Focal spot: LARGE
Track: MO
Filter: MO
Manual density correction: +0
JOB CARDS

HV: 28 kV

5.4.4 Keep the Senographe DMR in the same configuration as given in section 5.3.7.

5.4.5 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film corresponding to the screen pair being calibrated. Place
it on the left side of the Stereotix 2 cassette holder as viewed from the front of the gantry.

5.4.6 Take an exposure and note down the resulting mAs value.

5.4.7 Slide the cassette to the right side of the Stereotix 2 cassette holder.

5.4.8 Rotate tube–carrying arm to left Stereotix position (i.e. rotated to the right side as viewed from the
front of the gantry).

5.4.9 Take an exposure.

5.4.10 Develop the film and measure the optical density of the right Stereotix 2 image according to the
technique given at the beginning of section 5.

5.4.11 The optical density of the right Stereotix 2 image must not be outside the tolerance of the reference
optical density ±0.1 (the reference optical density was chosen in section 5.3.2). If the optical density
is within this tolerance, skip directly to section 5.4.13 below.

Note: The reference optical density chosen and entered in section 5.3.2 can no longer be displayed at
this point; it was erased and replaced by the default value when the machine was returned to
application mode for these checks.

3–120
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STE-


REOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 019 7 of 8

5.4.12 If the optical density of the right Stereotix 2 image on the film is outside this tolerance, repeat the
calibration procedure, but, instead of entering the mAs value given in section 5.3.9, use the mAs
value obtained in section 5.4.6 above. To do this, perform the following sequence:

1. Starting from application mode, select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/


ALGO/FSC=x/CALIB/Energ/CONFIG/STEREO on the console.

2. Select SETUP/PARAM/OD_R/CHANGE on the console. Re–enter the desired reference


optical density by using the NEXT and VALID keys and rotating the kV dial.

3. Repeat sections 5.3.7 to 5.3.14 EXCEPT THAT IN SECTION 5.3.9 YOU MUST ENTER THE
RESULTING MAS VALUE OBTAINED FROM THE CHECK EXPOSURE TAKEN IN SEC-
TION 5.4.6. DO NOT ENTER THE VALUE GIVEN IN SECTION 5.3.9.

4. Proceed to checks in section 5.4.

JOB CARDS
5.4.13 Measure the optical density of the left Stereotix 2 image according to the technique given at the
beginning of section 5.
The difference between this density and the density of the right Stereotix 2 image must be less
than 0.1. If this is not the case, there is a problem with the calibration done in Job Card IST 018
”CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL IN STEREOTIX POSITIONS”. In this case, repeat Job
Card IST 018, then this Job Card in its entirety.

5.4.14 Rotate the tube–carrying arm to its center position.

5.4.15 Install the cassette loaded with fresh film in the center of the Stereotix 2 cassette holder.

5.4.16 Keeping the Senographe DMR set up as given in section 5.4.3, take an exposure.

5.4.17 Develop the film and measure its optical density according to the technique given at the beginning
of section 5.
The difference between this density and the density of either the right Stereotix 2 image OR the
left Stereotix 2 image measured above must be less than 0.1. If this is not the case, there is a prob-
lem with the calibration done in Job Card IST 018 ”CALIBRATION OF PHOTO CELL IN
STEREOTIX POSITIONS”. In this case, repeat Job Card IST 018, then this Job Card in its
entirety.

5.4.18 If necessary, disable use of the screen pair being calibrated. (From application mode, select
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/AOP/FILM/ALGO/FSC=x/VALID/NO on the console.) (See
CAUTION in section 3.)

3–121
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF REFERENCE ENERGY IN STE-


REOTIX 2 MODE FOR A GIVEN SCREEN PAIR Job Card IST 019 8 of 8

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–122
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 020 1 of 2

Purpose: AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP Version No.:


Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
None

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION These procedures produce X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
This Job Card should only be used when the performance of Job Card IST 003 ”CALIBRATION OF X–RAY
TUBE HEATER CURRENT” has been impossible due to excessive arcing.

SECTION 5
AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP
This Job Card provides the procedure for re–starting an X–ray tube that was known to be good upon leaving
the factory, but which now exhibits arcing after a long period of inactivity.
The principle is to take a series of 12 pre–determined exposures, starting at low kV values and progressively
increasing towards high kV values. If arcing occurs during an exposure, some or all exposures are automati-
cally repeated. If persistent arcing occurs, the software automatically terminates the warm–up procedure.

3–123
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

AUTOMATIC X–RAY TUBE WARM–UP


Job Card IST 020 2 of 2

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR.

5.1.1 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch
B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3).

Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

5.1.2 Select SETUP/GENE/INSTAL/GENE/GENE/TUBE/WarmUp on the console. The track/kV


combination for the first exposure should appear on the console display.

5.2 Perform X–ray tube warm–up.

5.2.1 Press the 2nd trigger button and HOLD IT DOWN while the exposures are taken.
JOB CARDS

Note: There is a time delay of 10 seconds between exposures. You can release the 2nd trigger button dur-
ing this 10 second period, then press it again to continue, but the minimum time between exposures
will still be 10 seconds. If the tube overheats at some point, exposures will be inhibited until it
cools down again. During the cooling period, the 2nd trigger button can be released; as soon as
the display shows that the X–ray tube has sufficiently cooled, press the 2nd trigger button to con-
tinue.

5.2.2 When the warm–up procedure is finished, the message ”Tube OK” normally appears on the console
display. If persistent arcing occurred during the procedures, the message ”Too many spits” appears
on the console display.

3–124
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 021 1 of 6

Purpose: CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL Version No.:


CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D ”Ready Pack” or ”cardboard cassette” films (24 x 30 format)

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ruler calibrated in mm (minimum length 30 cm)

JOB CARDS
D Pen or pencil capable of marking the surface of an X–ray film
D Thumb tacks or push pins
D 2.5 mm Allen wrench
D 8 mm hollow offset tubular socket wrench

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION This procedure produces X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None

SECTION 5
CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM
The objective is to check (and adjust if necessary) the lateral alignment of the following three points:
D X–ray tube focal spot
D Center point between lateral collimator blades
D Center of image receptor support

3–125
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL


CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM Job Card IST 021 2 of 6

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the exposure.

5.1.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


– No compression paddle
– No bucky installed
– SID = 610 mm
– Mo track
– Large focal spot

5.1.2 Take a new cardboard cassette or Ready Pack and insert three thumb tacks through it, FROM THE
SIDE THAT WILL FACE THE X–RAY TUBE, in the following way:
– Two thumb tacks inserted along the (long) edge of the film that will be at the front edge
JOB CARDS

of the image receptor support, at approximately 2 cm in from this edge and approxi-
mately 4 cm inwards from the two shorter edges
– The third thumb tack along the (short) edge of the film that will be on the left side of
the image receptor support, approximately 2 cm in from this edge and approximately
12 cm from the rear edge of the film.

Refer to illustration 1 below.

3–126
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL


CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM Job Card IST 021 3 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 1
PLACEMENT OF THREE THUMB TACKS TO BE INSERTED IN THE READY PACK

APPROX 12 CM
READY PACK
TUBE SIDE

JOB CARDS
APPROX 2 CM

APPROX 4 CM
APPROX 4 CM

APPROX 2 CM
APPROX 2 CM

Note: It is NOT important to insert the three thumb tacks in a perfectly ”squared” alignment with the
edges of the Ready Pack.

5.1.3 Place the Ready Pack on the image receptor support so that the points of the two ”front” thumb tacks
butt perfectly up against the front edge of the image receptor support and the third thumb tack butts
perfectly up against the left edge of the image receptor support. THE POSITIONING OF THE
THREE THUMB TACKS AGAINST THE IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT IS VERY IMPOR-
TANT TO THE SUCCESS OF THESE CHECKS.

3–127
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL


CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM Job Card IST 021 4 of 6

5.2 Take the exposure.

5.2.1 Using normal application mode, set up a manual (2–point) exposure as follows:
– 25 kV
– 20 mAs

5.2.2 Take the exposure.

5.2.3 Remove the thumb tacks and develop the film.

5.2.4 Using the ruler and a pen or pencil, carefully draw a straight line between the rearward edges (i.e.
the edges of the holes closer to the front edge of the image receptor support during the exposure)
of the two holes left by the thumb tacks on the front edge of the film. (See illustrations 2 and 3
below.) THIS LINE IS THE REFERENCE FOR ALL THE FOLLOWING GEOMETRICAL
JOB CARDS

MEASUREMENTS.

5.2.5 Attach the developed film to a sheet of graph paper (or other support marked with a series of perpen-
dicular lines), carefully aligning the front edge reference line with a convenient line on the graph
paper. See illustration 3 below.
ILLUSTRATION 2
DETAIL OF WHERE TO DRAW REFERENCE LINE ON FILM WITH RESPECT TO HOLES LEFT BY THUMB TACKS

REFERENCE LINE DRAWN


IN INK OR PENCIL

TOWARDS
FRONT EDGE OF
HOLE LEFT IN FILM FILM
BY THUMB TACK

3–128
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL


CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM Job Card IST 021 5 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 3
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR LATERAL CENTERING OF X–RAY TUBE FOCAL SPOT WITH RESPECT TO THE
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT
DEVELOPED READY PACK FILM GRAPH PAPER EXPOSED AREA OF FILM

JOB CARDS
t2 t1

approx. 100 mm

THIS LINE COR-


RESPONDS TO
THE LEFT EDGE OF
IMAGE RECEPTOR LINE DRAWN IN INK OR PEN-
REPORT CIL BETWEEN THE REAR-
WARD EDGES OF THE TWO
FRONT THUMB TACK HOLES –
THUMB TACK HOLES IN FILM
USED AS A REFERENCE FOR
INDICATING ALIGNMENT WITH
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT
FRONT EDGE

3–129
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING AND ADJUSMENT OF LATERAL


CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM Job Card IST 021 6 of 6

5.3 Check lateral centering of X–ray beam on image receptor support.

5.3.1 Use the ruler to measure carefully distances t1 and t2 in mm in parallel with the reference line and
at approximately 100 mm rearward from the front edge of the film (see illustration 3).

5.3.2 Calculate the offset E:


E (mm) = 275 – (t1 + 2*t2)
where 275 mm is the width of the image receptor support, and t1 and t2 are expressed in mm

5.3.3 IF E ≥ 3 mm, proceed to section 5.4 below. If not, this is the end of the Job Card.

5.4 Correct lateral centering (if necessary) of X–ray beam on image receptor support.

5.4.1 Determine, according to whether E is positive or negative, from which side of the X–ray tube hous-
ing the adjustment will be made:
JOB CARDS

– If E is POSITIVE, adjust from the LEFT side of the housing


– If E is NEGATIVE, adjust from the RIGHT side of the housing

5.4.2 Adjust lateral position of X–ray tube focal spot by following the procedure below:

1. Place the 8 mm hollow offset tubular socket wrench around the adjustment screw locknut
located on the side of the housing determined in section 5.4.1 above.

2. Hold the adjustment screw in the center of the locknut in place with the 2.5 mm Allen wrench.

3. Keeping the adjustment screw in place, loosen the locknut.

4. Use the 2.5 mm Allen wrench to UNSCREW (turn COUNTER–clockwise) the adjustment
screw according to the formula NUMBER OF TURNS = 0.5 * E.

5. Keeping the adjustment screw in place, re–tighten the locknut.

6. Loosen the corresponding locknut on the OPPOSITE side of the housing and TIGHTEN (turn
CLOCKWISE) the adjustment screw until snug, then re–tighten the locknut.

5.5 Check results by repeating sections 5.1 to 5.3.

3–130
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 022 1 of 2

Purpose: CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES Version No.:


Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Accurate digital voltmeter (Fluke 8060 or equivalent)

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
IST 011 done.

SECTION 5
FIRST POWER–ON CHECK
The objective in this section is to detect (before it’s too late) an incorrect mains supply configuration.

5.1 Check keep–alive supply voltage.

5.1.1 Check that generator Mains Supply Switch 200–S1 is open (i.e. in the ”0” position) and that mains
source is turned OFF.

5.1.2 Connect the voltmeter (set to 20 VDC scale) to generator mains power board 200–PL1 between test
points PT15 (+VE) and PT12 (0VE). See illustration 1 below.

5.1.3 Close generator Mains Supply Switch 200–S1 (i.e. turn it to the ”1” position) and read the voltmeter
immediately. It should read +8 ± 2 VDC.

3–131
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING BASIC SUPPLY VOLTAGES


Job Card IST 022 2 of 2

ILLUSTRATION 1
LOCATION OF TEST POINTS PT14 AND PT15 FOR CHECKING KEEP–ALIVE SUPPLY VOLTAGE ON GENERATOR
MAINS DISTRIBUTION BOARD 200–PL1

R1 R4

TR2

0VE
X1 PT12

PT14 PT15
JOB CARDS

– VE + VE

GENERATOR MAINS DISTRIBUTION BOARD 200–PL1

If the voltmeter reading is outside this range, turn mains source OFF
CAUTION IMMEDIATELY and check configuration of voltage selection board IN2 on
generator mains distribution board 200–PL1 (see Job Card IST 011 ”CON-
NECTION OF MAINS SUPPLY”).

5.1.4 Move the voltmeter connection to PT14 (–VE). The voltmeter should read –8V ± 2VDC

5.1.5 Connect the voltmeter (set to 500 VAC scale) to generator mains power board 200–PL1 between
terminals 1 (0V) and 4 (220V).

5.1.6 Turn console on and read the voltmeter immediately. It should read 220 ± 20 VAC.

If the voltmeter reading is outside this range, open generator Mains Supply
CAUTION Switch 200–S1 IMMEDIATELY (i.e. turn it to the ”0” position) and check
mains voltage selection wire ”SEL” on generator mains distribution board
200–PL1
(see Job Card IST 011 ”CONNECTION OF MAINS SUPPLY”).

5.2 Check generator 5.1Vdc supply voltage.

5.2.1 On generator CPU board 400–PL3, measure DC voltage +5.1 ± 0.05 V between TP110 and TP111
(GND).

Note: This voltage can be adjusted via the potentiometer located on the switching power supply, just be-
side the connector. Once adjustment is made, apply a drop of locking compound to prevent
unintentional change of the potentiometer’s setting.

3–132
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 023 1 of 2

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE Version No.:


DETECTOR Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Calibrated force detector capable of measuring compression force between the compression paddle and
the cassette holder, required accuracy ±0.5 daN – the Mammo compression scale Part No.

JOB CARDS
46-194427P407 is recommended.

SECTION 3
SPECIAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR
The objective is to calibrate the compression force detector.

WARNING
If a power line failure occurs during the calibration (before a checksum is done), it is mandatory to repeat this
calibration from the beginning.

5.1 Preparation
Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on gen-
erator CPU board 400–PL3).

Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

3–133
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE


DETECTOR Job Card IST 023 2 of 2

5.2 Perform the calibration.

5.2.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


– Arm rotation at 0°
– Contact mode
– Any compression paddle installed

5.2.2 Raise the compression paddle and place the force detector on the cassette holder.

5.2.3 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/COMP/


FORCE/CALIB/MEASURE on the console.

5.2.4 With the compression paddle completely raised and out of contact (i.e. in its home position), press
the ”0daN” key on the console.
JOB CARDS

5.2.5 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the force detector. Using the compression fine–ad-
justment knob, adjust the compression to exactly 3 daN on the force detector.

5.2.6 Press the ”3daN” key on the console.

5.2.7 Still using the compression fine–adjustment knob, increase the compression to exactly 6 daN on
the force detector.

5.2.8 Press the ”6daN” key on the console.

5.2.9 Continue this process for 9 and 12 daN, then press the ”ETC” key on the console and proceed with
15, 18, 21, 24 and 27 daN.

5.2.10 Select SETUP/CALCUL on the console. This executes the calculation of the new force detector
calibration parameters.

5.2.11 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode.

5.2.12 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle (the paddle must return to its home posi-
tion).

5.3 Check the results.

5.3.1 With the arm at 0° (i.e. X–ray tube above the cassette holder), bring the compression paddle into
contact once again with the force detector. Increase the compression until maximum force is
reached (i.e. compression cannot be further increased). Read the force detector measurement and
check that it is within ±1 daN of the maximum compression force chosen in the SETUP/ARM/
VALID/MEDICAL/FORCE menu.

5.3.2 Repeat the above check with the arm rotated to 180° (i.e. X–ray tube below the cassette holder).

Note: The maximum compression force must never exceed 30 daN. This limit must always be checked
after any maintenance (preventive or corrective) of the compression assembly to insure patient
safety.

3–134
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 024 1 of 4

Purpose: MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION Version No.:


FORCE TESTS Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D A 3 kg weight whose dimensions allow it to be placed on top of the compression paddle

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 023 ”CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR”

SECTION 5
MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION FORCE TESTS
The objectives are:
D Check that a compression force (limit IC: In Compression) of at least 22 daN can be reached when the
arm is rotated by 180° with the paddle drive motor current limit value set between 50% ard 70% (motor’s
maximum current rating).
D Check that a decompression force (limit OC: Out of Compression) of at least 3 daN can be reached when
the arm is at 0° with the paddle drive motor current limit value set to 65% of the motor’s maximum current
rating. (This ensures that the compression paddle will rise and stay up when decompression is requested.)

3–135
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION
FORCE TESTS Job Card IST 024 2 of 4

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the tests.

5.1.1 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch
B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3).

Note: This must be done only if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

5.1.2 Set up the Senographe DMR in contact mode with a compression paddle installed.

5.1.3 Inhibit the cassette detection in medical menu. Starting from application mode:
SETUP/MEDICAL/FILM/NO

5.2 Checking and adjusting the limit IC

5.2.1 Starting from application mode, select


JOB CARDS

SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/COMP/LIMIT/CALIB/LIMIT_IC on the console.


Check that the limit IC is set in between 50% and 70% for the motor current value and perform
the test.

5.2.2 Rotate the arm to 180° (i.e, X–ray tube below the cassette holder).

5.2.3 Bring the compression paddle into contact with the cassette holder.

Note: Be ready to read the compression force displayed on the gantry readout unit, the paddle should
release and fall towards the tube housing for a compression close to 22 daN.

5.2.4 Increase compression to 22 daN as displayed on the gantry display panel. You must be able to reach
22 daN without the compression paddle releasing. If the compression paddle releases for a force
lower or higher than 22 daN, perform the adjustment in step 5.2.5; otherwise go to step 5.3.

5.2.5 Set up the limit IC to its minimum: Starting from application mode, select
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/COMP/LIMIT/CALIB/LIMIT_IC on the con-
sole.Use the + and - key on the console to set the motor current value to 50%. Enter this values with
the VAL key on the console.

5.2.6 Increase compression to 22 daN as displayed on the gantry display panel. You must be able to reach
22 daN without the compression paddle releasing.

5.2.7 If the compression paddle releases before a force of 22 daN is reached, increase the compression
motor current value by 5%, then try again to reach 22 daN. Continue increasing the maximum in
compression motor current value in steps of 5%, if necessary, until 22 daN can be reached.

Note: Between each compression, request a total decompression of the compression paddle, using the
appropriate footswitch.

3–136
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION
FORCE TESTS Job Card IST 024 3 of 4

5.3 Check the limit OC.

5.3.1 Rotate the arm to 0° (i.e, X–ray tube above the cassette holder).

5.3.2 Bring the compression paddle into contact with the cassette holder.

5.3.3 Select SETUP/LIMIT_OC on the console. The maximum motor current value (in decompression
mode) should be set to 65% otherwuise use the + and - key on the console to set this value. Enter
this value with the VAL key on the console and return to the application menu.

5.3.4 Place the 3 kg weight on top of the compression paddle.

5.3.5 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle using the appropriate pedal. The com-
pression paddle must rise smoothly to its home position.

5.3.6 If the compression paddle slips or releases, check that the compression paddle drive belt is not slip-

JOB CARDS
ping. If it is slipping, adjust or replace the belt.

Note: The maximum out of compression motor current adjustment range is limited to 65%.

5.3.7 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode.

5.3.8 If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point, turn the Senographe DMR off, then
back on again.

3–137
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

MINIMUM COMPRESSION/DECOMPRESSION
FORCE TESTS Job Card IST 024 4 of 4

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–138
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 025 1 of 4

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS Version No.:


MEASUREMENT Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 20 x 20 cm)

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 023 ”CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION FORCE DETECTOR”
D Check the configuration of the senographe with the bucky used (see section 5 installation steering, step
13.b.ii).

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS MEASUREMENT
The objective is to calibrate the breast thickness measurement. Since the compression paddle and its drive
train, as well as the cassette holder or magnification device undergo deflection when under compression, a
compensation factor must be calculated to correct for changes in compression force at a fixed breast thickness.
Two calibrations must in fact be done, one for contact mode and one for magnification mode.

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the calibrations.


Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch B1 on gen-
erator CPU board 400–PL3).

Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

3–139
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS


MEASUREMENT Job Card IST 025 2 of 4

5.2 Perform the contact mode calibration.

5.2.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in contact mode with the 18 x 24 compression paddle installed.

5.2.2 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle to its home position.

Note: This MUST be done before entering the gantry installation menus.

5.2.3 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/THICK/CON-


TACT/CALIB on the console.

5.2.4 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the cassette holder. Using the compression fine–
adjustment knob, adjust the compression to between 3 and 5 daN as read on the gantry display panel.
Press the ”<5daN” key on the console.

5.2.5 Increase the compression to between 15 and 20 daN as read on the gantry display panel. Press the
JOB CARDS

”>15daN” key on the console. The ”Calcul” key appears on the console display.

5.2.6 Press the ”Calcul” key on the console. This executes the calibration calculation for contact mode.

5.3 Check the contact mode calibration results.

5.3.1 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle.

5.3.2 Keeping the Senographe DMR in contact mode, place 4 cm of plexiglass in the center of the bucky.

5.3.3 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the plexiglass.

5.3.4 Verify for any compression force between zero and 20 daN of compression (as displayed on the
gantry display panel), that the breast thickness displayed on the gantry display panel does not vary
outside the range of 35 to 45 mm (i.e. plexiglass thickness of 40 mm, ± 5 mm).

5.4 Perform the magnification mode calibration.

5.4.1 Install the magnification device and the 18 x 24 compression paddle.

5.4.2 Select SETUP/SETUP/MAGNIF/CALIB on the console.

5.4.3 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle to its home position, using the appropriate
pedal.

5.4.4 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the magnification device. Using the compression
fine–adjustment knob, adjust the compression to between 3 and 5 daN as read on the gantry display
panel. Press the ”<5daN” key on the console.

5.4.5 Increase the compression to between 15 and 20 daN as read on the gantry display panel. Press the
”>15daN” key on the console. The ”Calcul” key appears on the console display.

3–140
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS


MEASUREMENT Job Card IST 025 3 of 4

5.4.6 Press the ”Calcul” key on the console. This executes the calibration calculation for magnification
mode.

5.5 Check the magnification mode calibration results.

5.5.1 Request a total decompression of the compression paddle.

5.5.2 Place 4 cm of plexiglass on the magnification device.

5.5.3 Lower the compression paddle into contact with the plexiglass.

5.5.4 Verify for any compression force between zero and 20 daN of compression (as displayed on the
gantry display panel), that the breast thickness displayed on the gantry display panel does not vary
outside the range of 37 to 43 mm (i.e. plexiglass thickness of 40 mm, ± 3 mm).

5.6 Return the Senographe DMR to its normal state.

JOB CARDS
5.6.1 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode.

5.6.2 If you are turning the Senographe DMR back over to the user at this point, turn the Senographe
DMR off, then back on again.

3–141
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF BREAST THICKNESS


MEASUREMENT Job Card IST 025 4 of 4

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–142
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 026 1 of 2

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION Version No.:


Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
None

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 015 “CALIBRATION OF COMPRESSION ARM ANGULATION”. Arm angulation must
be correctly calibrated to ensure that grid movement is made in the correct direction when the angulation
is positive or negative.

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION
The objective is to calculate the gain and offset necessary for determining the grid position. The calibration
is fully automatic. A check is included at the end of this automatic calibration to see if the calculated gain and
offset are within a certain range. If they are not, an error message appears on the console display.

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the calibration of grid position.

5.1.1 Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch (switch
B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3).

Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to SET-
UP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

5.1.2 Set up the Senographe DMR in contact mode with the 18 x 24 bucky.

5.1.3 Set arm rotation to 0° (Bucky is horizontal).

3–143
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION


Job Card IST 026 2 of 2

5.2 Perform the calibration of grid position.

5.2.1 Starting from application mode, select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/GRID/CALIB


on the console.

5.2.2 Select CALIB on the console. If the calibration is successful, ”CALIBRATION OK” appears on
the console display within a few seconds.
– If “Invalid gain/offset” or other error message is displayed, the bucky is to be replaced.

5.2.3 On the console, select each of the following calibration parameters in turn; note the values and
check them against the acceptable values given in the table below:
OFFSET; GAIN; MIN; MAX
– If any of these values is out of range, the bucky is to be replaced.
JOB CARDS

5.2.4 Repeat steps 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 with the arm rotated to +90°.

5.2.5 Repeat steps 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 with the arm rotated to –90°.

5.2.6 Repeat steps 5.2.2 to 5.2.5 using the 24 x 30 bucky, if available.

5.2.7 Return to application mode (a CKSUM is not necessary when grid position parameters have been
changed).

5.2.8 If you are handing the Senographe DMR back to the user at this point, turn the Senographe DMR
off, then back on again.

PARAMETER ARM AT 0_ ARM AT +90_ ARM AT –90_ Acceptable Values


18 x 24 Bucky:
OFFSET 0.47 thru 0.53

GAIN 0.5 thru 0.6

MIN > 5000 (5.000E+3)

MAX < 60500 (6.050E+4)


24 x 30 Bucky:
OFFSET 0.47 thru 0.53

GAIN 0.5 thru 0.6

MIN > 5000 (5.000E+3)

MAX < 60500 (6.050E+4)

3–144
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 027 1 of 14

Purpose: CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT Version No.:


GEOMETRY Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Ready Pack or cardboard cassette films (24 x 30 format)

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ruler calibrated in mm (minimum length 30 cm).

JOB CARDS
D Writing implement capable of marking the surface of an X–ray film.
D Thumb tacks or push pins (at least 20 mm long)
D Plexiglas plates in thickness increments of 5mm. Plates used for AEC calibration are adequate.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION This procedure produces X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Job Card IST 029 must be done before commencing this procedure.

Note: This prerequisite is given as a reminder only.

3–145
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 2 of 14

SECTION 5
CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT GEOMETRY
The objective is to verify that the exposed area on the X–ray film is within the required tolerances for the fol-
lowing properties:
Parallelism between front collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Perpendicularity between left collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Perpendicularity between right collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Parallelism between rear collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Lateral centering of X–ray beam on image receptor support
Maximum overlap of X–ray beam beyond front edge of image receptor support (MQSA requirement)
Dimensions of exposed area (width and depth).
These checks are performed by making various geometrical measurements on an exposed cardboard cassette
JOB CARDS

or Ready Pack film.

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the exposure.


Set the lateral, rear, and front, collimator margins according to local standards or the doctor’s preference:

1. Starting from application mode, change the position of the installation menu enable switch
(switch B1 on generator CPU board 400–PL3).

Note: This must only be done if the Senographe DMR has been switched off since the last access to
SETUP/GENE/INSTAL or SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL

2. Select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CONFIG/COLLIM/MARG_L on the console.

3. Press the + or – key on the console, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired lateral collimator
margin in millimetres is obtained (see the table below for standards and recommendations to
get full film blackening).

Standard Lateral margin (mm) = MARG_L Selection*


CEI** +2 .....
UK +3 .....
AUSTRALIA** 0 .....
MQSA/CDRH +2 .....
* Note down (X) the selected value.
** Standard authorizes the full film blackening and in these tables, we indicate the margin configu-
ration to get it. But the user can also use margins inside the film.

4. Select VALID on the console.

3–146
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 3 of 14

5. Select SETUP/MARG_R on the console.

6. Press the + or – key on the console, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired rear collimator mar-
gin in millimetres is obtained (see the table below for standards and recommendations to get full
film blackening).

Standard Rear margin (mm) = MARG_R Selection*


CEI** +2 .....
UK +2 .....
AUSTRALIA** 0 .....
MQSA +2 .....
* Note down (X) the selected value.

JOB CARDS
** Standard authorizes the full film blackening and in these tables, we indicate the margin configu-
ration to get it. But the user can also use margins inside the film.

7. Select VALID on the console.

8. Select SETUP/MARG_F on the console.

9. Press the + or – key on the console, repeatedly if necessary, until the desired front collimator
margin in millimetres is obtained (see the table below for standards and recommendations to
get full film blackening).

Standard Front margin (mm) = MARG_F Selection*


CEI +2 .....
UK +2 .....
AUSTRALIA +3 .....
MQSA +2 .....
* Note down (X) the selected value.

10. Select VALID on the console.

11. Perform a “CKSUM” and return to application mode.

5.1.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


– No compression paddle
– No Bucky
– SID = 660 mm

3–147
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 4 of 14

5.1.2 Take a new cardboard cassette or Ready Pack and insert three thumb tacks through it, from the side
that will face the x–ray tube, in the following way:
– two thumb tacks inserted along the (long) edge of the film that will be at the front edge
of the image receptor support, at approximately 20mm in from this edge and approxi-
mately 40mm in from the two shorter edges
– the third thumb tack along the (short) edge of the film that will be on the left side of the
image receptor support, approximately 20mm in from this edge and approximately
120mm from the rear edge of the film.
Refer to Illustration 1 below.
ILLUSTRATION 1
PLACEMENT OF THREE THUMB TACKS TO BE INSERTED IN THE READY PACK
JOB CARDS

APPROX 120mm
READY PACK
TUBE SIDE
APPROX 20mm

APPROX 40mm
APPROX 40mm

APPROX 20mm
APPROX
20mm

Note: It is not important to insert the three thumb tacks in a perfectly squared alignment with the edges
of the Ready Pack.

3–148
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 5 of 14

5.1.3 Place 15 mm of plexiglas on the image receptor top as shown in illustration 2, to raise the Ready
pack film.

Note: This arrangement is done to simulate the exact film placement when a Bucky and a cassette are
used. This configuration is mandatory to measure accurately the X-Ray area in step 5.8, 5.9
&5.10 (particularly critical for front edge position).
The reason for such criticity is the tolerance decreasing (now 1% of SID for front edge overlap)
induced by various country regulations.

ILLUSTRATION 2

TOP VIEW
IMAGE RECEPTOR
TOP

JOB CARDS
THUMB TACK

PLEXIGLASS PLATE
(15 MM)
(Placed between film
and image receptor)

READY PACK FILM THUMB TACK

5.1.4 Place the Ready Pack on the plexiglas plate support so that the points of the two front thumb tacks
butt perfectly up against the front edge of the support and the third thumb tack butts perfectly up
against the left edge of the support. Correct positioning of all three thumb tacks is very important
for the success of the ensuing checks.

3–149
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 6 of 14

5.2 Take the exposure.

5.2.1 Using normal application mode, set up a manual (2–point) exposure as follows:
– Maximum format
– Mo track
– Large focal spot
– 25 kV
– 20 mAs

CAUTION It is critical that the TRACK is MO and that the FOCAL SPOT is LARGE.
JOB CARDS

5.2.2 Take the exposure.

5.2.3 Remove the thumb tacks and develop the film.

5.2.4 Using the ruler and a pen or pencil, carefully draw a straight line between the rearward edges (i.e.
the edges of the holes closer to the front edge of the image receptor support during the exposure)
of the two holes left by the thumb tacks on the front edge of the film (see Illustration 3 below).
Draw another line parallel to the first one and shifted by 3 mm inside the film. This line represents
the edge of the film inside a cassette and is the reference for all the following measurements.

5.2.5 Attach the developed film to a sheet of graph paper (or other support marked with a series of perpen-
dicular lines), carefully aligning the front edge reference line with a convenient line on the graph
paper. See illustration 4 below.
ILLUSTRATION 3
DETAIL OF WHERE TO DRAW REFERENCE LINE ON FILM WITH RESPECT TO HOLES LEFT BY THUMB TACKS
REFERENCE LINE DRAWN LINE DETERMINED
IN INK OR PENCIL BY HOLES
3 mm

TOWARDS
FRONT EDGE OF
FILM

HOLE LEFT IN FILM


BY THUMB TACK

3–150
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 7 of 14

5.3 Check parallelism between the front collimator blade and the front edge of the image receptor support.
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances y1 and y2 (see illustration 4).
CRITERION: The difference between y1 and y2 must be LESS THAN 2 mm.
If the criterion is not met, loosen the collimator assembly hold–down screws and rotate the assembly to correct
the parallelism. Re–tighten the screws. Check by repeating the exposure. Once the parallelism is satisfactory,
proceed to the next check below (use the NEW film obtained from the most recent check exposure in all the
following checks).

5.4 Check perpendicularity between left collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support.
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances z1 and z2. (See illustration 5.)
CRITERION: The difference between z1 and z2 must be LESS THAN 1.5 mm.

JOB CARDS
Note: It is important to notice that z1 and z2 are measured between the left edge of the exposed area of
the film and ANY convenient perpendicular line on the graph paper.

If the criterion is not met, exchange the collimator. No field adjustment is possible.

5.5 Check perpendicularity between right collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support.
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances z1’ and z2’. (See illustration 5.)
CRITERION: The difference between z1’ and z2’ must be LESS THAN 1.5 mm.

Note: It is important to notice that z1’ and z2’ are measured between the right edge of the exposed area
of the film and ANY convenient perpendicular line on the graph paper.

If the criterion is not met, exchange the collimator. No field adjustment is possible.

5.6 Check parallelism between rear collimator blade and front edge of image receptor support
Use the ruler to measure carefully distances d1 and d2. (See illustration 6.)
CRITERION: The difference between d1 and d2 must be LESS THAN 2 mm.

Note: It is important to notice that d1 and d2 are measured between the rear edge of the exposed area and
the REFERENCE LINE.

If the criterion is not met, exchange the collimator. No field adjustment is possible.

3–151
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 8 of 14

5.7 Check lateral centering of x–ray beam on image receptor support


Use the ruler to measure carefully distances t1 and t2 at approximately 100 mm rearward from the front edge
of the film. (See illustration 7.)
t1 = . . . . . mm t2 = . . . . . . mm
CRITERION: 275 – (t1 + 2t2) must be LESS THAN 4 mm.
Where 275 mm is the width of the image receptor support and distances t1 and t2 are in mm.
If the criterion is not met, adjust the lateral position of the X–ray tube housing as described at the end of Job
Card IST 021 ”CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT OF LATERAL CENTERING OF X–RAY BEAM”.
Check by repeating the exposure before proceeding (be sure to re–configure the Senographe DMR as given
in THIS Job Card before taking the exposure). Once the lateral centering is satisfactory, proceed to the next
check below (use the NEW film obtained from this most recent check exposure in all the following checks).
JOB CARDS

5.8 Check width of exposed area


Use the ruler to measure carefully distance t1 at approximately 100 mm rearward from the reference line (see
illustration 7). Same value as in 5.7 above:
t1 = . . . . . mm
CRITERION: t1 must be in the range of (238 + 2* MARG_L) ± 3 mm (respect the sign of MARG_L! ).
Where MARG_L was determined and entered in Section 5.1.

EXAMPLE 1: If margin is set to +2 mm (CDRH Standard), then the criterion is: 239 mm < t1 < 245 mm.

EXAMPLE 2: If margin is set to +4 mm, then the criterion is: 243 mm < t1 < 249 mm.

If this criterion is not met, perform Job Cards IST 029 and IST 030, then repeat the check exposure (be sure
to re–configure the Senographe DMR as described in Section 5.1 above before taking the exposure) and
proceed to the next check below (use the NEW film obtained from this most recent check exposure in the
following check).

5.9 Check depth of exposed area.


Use the ruler to measure carefully distance d3 at approximately the lateral center of the exposed area. (See
illustration 6.)

CRITERION: d3 must be in the range of (178 + MARG_R) ±3mm where MARG_R was determined and
entered in Section 5.1.

EXAMPLE: If Margin is set to +2 mm (CDRH standard) then the criterion is: 177 mm < d3 < 183 mm.

If this criterion is not met, perform Job Cards IST 029 and IST 030, then repeat the check exposure (be sure
to re–configure the Senographe DMR as given in THIS Job Card before taking the exposure) and proceed to
the next check bellow, using the film obtained with Job Card IST 030.

3–152
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 9 of 14

5.10 Check the front margin of the exposed area


Use the ruler to measure carefully the distance W (see Illustration 8). The value sign is positive if the X-Ray
area exceed the image receptor edge, negative if the X-Ray area is inside the image receptor.

Criterion: (take care of Marg_F and W sign ! )


Marg_F –1.5 mm < W < Marg_F + 1.5 mm
Where Marg_F is the value entered in Section 5.1.

EXAMPLE 1: If Marg_F is set to +2 (CDRH, CEI standard)


0.5 mm < W < 3.5 mm

EXAMPLE 2: If Marg_F is set to –2 (Australia standard)


–3.5 mm < W < – 0.5 mm

JOB CARDS
If these criteria are not met, perform Job Cards IST 029 and IST 030, then repeat the check exposure (be sure
to re–configure the Senographe DMR as described in Section 5.1 above before taking the exposure).

3–153
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 10 of 14

ILLUSTRATION 4
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR PARALLELISM BETWEEN FRONT EDGE OF EXPOSED AREA AND FRONT EDGE OF
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT

DEVELOPED READY PACK FILM GRAPH PAPER EXPOSED AREA OF FILM


JOB CARDS

y1 y2

THIS LINE COR-


RESPONDS TO THE
LEFT EDGE OF
IMAGE RECEPTOR REFERENCE LINE DRAWN IN 5.2.4
REPORT
THUMB TACK HOLES IN FILM
INDICATING ALIGNMENT WITH
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT

3–154
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 11 of 14

ILLUSTRATION 5
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR PERPENDICULARITY BETWEEN LEFT AND RIGHT COLLIMATOR BLADES AND
FRONT EDGE OF IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT
DEVELOPED READY PACK FILM GRAPH PAPER EXPOSED AREA OF FILM

JOB CARDS
z2 Z2’

z1 z 1’

REFERENCE LINE DRAWN IN 5.2.4


THUMB TACK HOLES IN FILM
INDICATING ALIGNMENT WITH
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT

3–155
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 12 of 14

ILLUSTRATION 6
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR PARALLELISM BETWEEN REAR COLLIMATOR BLADE AND FRONT EDGE OF
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT
DEVELOPED READY PACK FILM GRAPH PAPER EXPOSED AREA OF FILM
JOB CARDS

d1 d3 d2

REFERENCE LINE DRAWN IN 5.2.4


THUMB TACK HOLES IN FILM
INDICATING ALIGNMENT WITH
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT

3–156
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 13 of 14

ILLUSTRATION 7
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR CENTERING OF LATERAL COLLIMATOR BLADES WITH RESPECT TO THE IMAGE
RECEPTOR SUPPORT
DEVELOPED READY PACK FILM GRAPH PAPER EXPOSED AREA OF FILM

JOB CARDS
t2 t1

approx. 100 mm

REFERENCE LINE DRAWN IN 5.2.4


THUMB TACK HOLES IN FILM
INDICATING ALIGNMENT WITH
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT

3–157
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CHECKING X–RAY FILM FORMAT


GEOMETRY Job Card IST 027 14 of 14

ILLUSTRATION 8
CHECKING EXPOSED FILM FOR MAXIMUM OVERLAP OF X–RAY BEAM BEYOND FRONT EDGE OF IMAGE RECEP-
TOR SUPPORT (MQSA REQUIREMENT)
DEVELOPED READY PACK FILM GRAPH PAPER EXPOSED AREA OF FILM
JOB CARDS

w1 w2

REFERENCE LINE DRAWN IN 5.2.4

THUMB TACK HOLES IN FILM


INDICATING ALIGNMENT WITH
IMAGE RECEPTOR SUPPORT NOTE: In this example , w is a positive value.

3–158
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 028 1 of 6

Purpose: LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION Version No.:


Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Ready pack or cardboard cassette films (24 x 30 format).

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ruler calibrated in mm.

JOB CARDS
D Writing implement capable of marking the surface of an X-ray film.
D Thumb tacks or push pins.

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION This procedure produces X-rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
Job Card IST 027 + IST 029 + IST 030 must be done before starting this procedure, and in that order.

Note: This prerequisite is given as a reminder only. If collimator lamp was just changed, Job Card
IST 036 must be performed first.

SECTION 5
LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION
The objective is to calibrate light centering for X-Ray and light format coincidence.
This calibration is performed by making an exposure on a cardboard cassette or Ready Pack film, followed
by a real time collimator blade adjustment.

5.1 Prepare the Senographe DMR for the exposure

5.1.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


– No compression paddle.
– Bucky 18 x 24 installed (mandatory).
– SID = 560 mm.

3–159
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION


Job Card IST 028 2 of 6

Note: A warning message “Set Sid to 560” will appear in the sub–menu if the SID is not correctly set.
In this case, simply reset the SID to 560. The message dissapears when the menu level is changed
(up or down).

5.1.2 Take a new cardboard cassette or Ready Pack and insert three thumb tacks through it, from the side
that will face the x-ray tube, in the following way:
– Two thumb tacks inserted along the (long) edge of the film that will be at the front edge of the
image receptor support, at approximately 20 mm in from this edge and approximately 40 mm
in from the two shorter edges.
– The third thumb tack along the (short) edge of the film that will be on the left side of the image
receptor support, approximately 20 mm in from this edge and approximately 120 mm from the
rear edge of the film.
Refer to Illustration 1 below.
ILLUSTRATION 1
JOB CARDS

PLACEMENT OF THREE THUMB TACKS TO BE INSERTED IN THE READY PACK

APPROX 120mm
READY PACK
TUBE SIDE
APPROX 20mm

APPROX 40mm
APPROX 40mm

APPROX 20mm
APPROX
20mm

3–160
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION


Job Card IST 028 3 of 6

Note: It is not important to insert the three thumb tacks in a perfectly squared alignment with the edges
of the Ready Pack.

5.1.3 Place the Ready Pack on the Bucky so that the points of two front thumb tacks butt perfectly up
against the front edge of the Bucky and the third thumb tack butts perfectly up against the lelt edge
of the Bucky. Correct positionning of all three thumb tacks is very important for the success of the
ensuing checks.

Note: The use of Bucky is mandatory for adjustment accuracy.

5.2 Take the exposure

5.2.1 Starting from application mode, select:

JOB CARDS
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/FORMAT/CALIB/LIGHT/EXPOSE
Change mAs value (default = 25 mAs) if required

5.2.2 Take the exposure.

5.2.3 Remove the thumb tacks and develop the film.

ILLUSTRATION 2
DETAIL OF WHERE TO DRAW REFERENCE LINE ON FILM WITH RESPECT TO HOLES LEFT BY THUMB TACKS
REFERENCE LINE DRAWN
IN INK OR PENCIL

TOWARDS
FRONT EDGE OF
FILM

HOLE LEFT IN FILM


BY THUMB TACK

3–161
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION


Job Card IST 028 4 of 6

5.2.4 Place the thumb tacks again at the same place and place the film at the same place on the Bucky.

Note: The film positioning is very important for the success of the following checks.
To improve the visibility of the lighted area limit, insert a white sheet of paper between the Bucky
top and the film.
It is advisable to turn off all room lighting before proceeding to the following steps.

5.3 Light Alignment Adjustment.


The purpose of this section is to adjust the front lighted area with the front X-Ray blackened area
(only for collimator equiped with a motor driven front blade).

5.3.1 Select: SETUP/ALIGN


JOB CARDS

Note: The centering light should turn on when you enter this menu.

5.3.2 Use + & – keys or rotate console kV button to change the displayed value. When the value is
changed, collimator front and rear blades are moving at once. For the moment, only consider the
movement of the collimator front blade. Stop changing the value when alignment is correct.

5.3.3 Press the VALID key to memorize the setting.

Note: If it is impossible to align perfectly the front blade (Diff_F is always above 2 mm, see illustration
3) perform Job Card IST 036 (Adjustment of centering device lamp).

5.4 Light Coverage Adjustment.


The purpose of this Section is to adjust the light coverage with the X-Ray blackened area.

5.4.1 select: SETUP/COVERAGE

Note: The centering light should turn off and on again when you enter this menu.

5.4.2 Use + & – keys or rotate console kV button to change the displayed value. The value changes by
step of 5 units, starting from the previous value (e.g. –12, –7, –2, +3, +8 ...etc). When the value is
changed, only the lateral and rear collimator blades are moving at once. Stop changing the value
when alignment is correct.

5.4.3 Press the VALID key to memorize the setting.

Note: If it is impossible to align simultaneously the lateral and rear blades, try to find a position where
Diff_L and Diff_R are both less than 2 mm (see illustration 4). If this compromise is impossible,
perform Job Card IST 036 (Adjustment of Centering device lamp).

5.5 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode

3–162
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION


Job Card IST 028 5 of 6

ILLUSTRATION 3

Diff_F

JOB CARDS
X-RAY BLACKENED
AREA
LIGHTED AREA

ILLUSTRATION 4

Diff_L

Diff_R

X-RAY BLACKENED
AREA
LIGHTED AREA

Ideally Diff_F, Diff_R and Diff_L are equal to zero.


Maximumum allowed deviation is +/– 2 mm from the X–Ray area on each side.

3–163
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

LIGHT CENTERING CALIBRATION


Job Card IST 028 6 of 6

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–164
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 029 1 of 4

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE REFERENCE Version No.:


ANGLE Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D 18 x 24 mm film and cassette

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ruler calibrated in mm (minimum length 20 cm)

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION This procedure produces X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D None

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE REFERENCE ANGLE
The objective is to determine the X–ray tube angle when in its reference position.
This calibration is done by taking an exposure (at a given SID) whose field coverage depth is limited by the
anode geometry and not by the rear collimator blade, measuring this field coverage depth, and entering this
depth into the Senographe DMR which subsequently calculates the X–ray tube angle when in its reference
position.

3–165
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE REFERENCE


ANGLE Job Card IST 029 2 of 4

5.1 Perform the calibration of X–ray tube reference angle.

5.1.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


– Contact mode
– 18 x 24 mm bucky and grid installed
– SID set to 560 mm

CAUTION The SID must not be changed from 560 mm until successful completion of
this Job Card.
JOB CARDS

5.1.2 Install a cassette loaded with fresh film in the bucky.

5.1.3 Select SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/TUBE/CALIB/EXPOSE/VALID/VALID on


the console.

5.1.4 Take an exposure by pressing the 2nd trigger button.

5.1.5 Develop the film and use the ruler to measure the distance between the front edge (edge closest to
the patient) of the film and the rear edge of the blackened area.

Note: Be sure to measure from the front edge of the FILM, even if the blackened area does not extend
to it.

Note: Be sure that the rear edge of the blackened area truly represents the end of the anode, and not a
stuck rear collimator blade (normally the software commands ”full open” during the exposure)
or other obstacle. This can be determined by the abruptness of the change in contrast between the
blackened area and the clear area. If the change is gradual, the exposure is good. If it is very abrupt,
it is necessary to correct the problem and repeat the calibration.

Note: If the blackened area of the film extends all the way to its rear edge, the X–ray tube reference angle
is severely incorrect and this calibration cannot be performed.

5.1.6 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/MEASURE on the console and enter the measured value in mm
using the NEXT and VALID keys.

3–166
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE REFERENCE


ANGLE Job Card IST 029 3 of 4

5.1.7 Select SETUP/Calculation on the console to execute the X–ray tube angle calculation.
Normally, the message ”calib OK” appears on the console display.
If the message ”calib error” appears instead, this means that the calculated X–ray tube reference
angle value is out of range. To check this, select SETUP/SETUP/PARAM on the console. The dis-
played value of the calculated X–ray tube reference angle A_REF must be between +2.800E–1 and
+3.500E–1 (0.28 and 0.35) radians.
If the angle is out of range, correct the problem and repeat the calibration (check first that the SID
was effectively set to 560 mm).

5.1.8 Perform a CKSUM and return to application mode.

5.1.9 If you’re turning the machine back over to the user at this point, turn the Senographe DMR off, then
back on again.

JOB CARDS

3–167
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF X–RAY TUBE REFERENCE


ANGLE Job Card IST 029 4 of 4

Blank page
JOB CARDS

3–168
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 030 1 of 4

Purpose: CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT, Version No.:


COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D 18 x 24 cm film and cassette

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Ruler calibrated in mm (minimum length 20 cm)

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION This procedure produces X–Rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES

D Job Cards IST 029 and IST 027 must have been done before commencing this procedure (these
prerequisites are given as a reminder only).
D Job Cards IST 028 if the collimator has a non–motorized front blade.

SECTION 5
CALIBRATION OF ALL COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS
The objective is to determine the lateral, rear, and front, collimator reference positions. The result is that the
software will then be able to command and obtain any desired X–Ray format.
This calibration is done by taking three exposures (at a given SID):
– A first exposure with blades at optical fork reference.
– A second exposure as large as possible.
– A third exposure as small as possible.
The width and depth positions of the blackened areas of the exposed film are then measured and entered in
the Senographe DMR which in turn calculates and saves the reference positions.

3–169
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT,


COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS Job Card IST 030 2 of 4

5.1 Perform acquisition of three exposures.

5.1.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in the following configuration:


– Large focal spot.
– Mo track
– Contact mode.
– Bucky 18 x 24 cm in place (with grid).
– SID must be set to 560 mm.

Note: A warning message “Set Sid to 560” will appear in the sub–menu if the SID is not correctly set.
In this case, simply reset the SID to 560. The message dissapears when the menu level is changed
(up or down).
JOB CARDS

1. The SID must not be changed from 560 mm until successful completion of
CAUTION this Job Card – the value is now the default for SID in the following calibra-
tion menus.

2. This calibration uses the full surface area of the film. Check that no mask
or other object is present in the beam before proceeding.

5.1.2 Install a cassette loaded with fresh film in the bucky.

5.1.3 Select:
SETUP/ARM/VALID/INSTAL/CALIB/FORMAT/CALIB/COLLIM/EXPOSE/VALID/
VALID

Note: The default value of 10 mAs can be modified if necessary; for normal cassettes use 5 mAs for each
exposure. The kV value is automatically set to 22 kV.
Too dark an exposure will produce a shadow around the exposed area, decreasing distance mea-
surement accuracy.

5.1.4 Take the three exposures in sequence; press the 2nd trigger button and hold it until the third
exposure is acquired (the messages: “1st exposure”, 2nd exposure”, “3rd exposure”, then “end of
acquisition”, are displayed).

5.1.5 Develop the film and use the ruler to measure the differents distances as shown in Illustration 1.

3–170
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT,


COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS Job Card IST 030 3 of 4

5.2 Enter measured values from DMR console. See illustration 1.

Note: During this procedure, warning messages Value too high or Value too low will be displayed if an
out-of-range value is entered. If this happens, check the value.

5.2.1 Select SETUP/SETUP/SETUP/REF_L/MEASURE and enter the measured (L1) value in mm


using the NEXT and VALID keys. The valid range is 188.9 < L1 < 195.6.

5.2.2 Once L1 value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.

ILLUSTRATION 1
BLACKENED FILM AREA DIMENSIONING

L2

JOB CARDS
R2

L1

L3

R1
R3

Front edge of film A1

5.2.3 Select SETUP/REF_R/MEASURE and enter the measured (R1) value in mm using the NEXT and
VALID keys. The valid range is 128.6 < R1 < 142.3.

5.2.4 Once R1 value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.

5.2.5 Select SETUP/REF_F/MEASURE and enter the measured (A1) value in mm using the NEXT and
VALID keys. The valid range is 7.15 < A1 < 16.86.

5.2.6 Once A1 value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.

5.2.7 L2 – L3 value must be entered as follows: Select SETUP/DIFF–L/MEASURE and enter the (L2
– L3) value in mm using the NEXT and VALID keys.

5.2.8 Once (L2 – L3) value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.

3–171
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

CALIBRATION OF LATERAL, REAR, AND FRONT,


COLLIMATOR BLADE REFERENCE POSITIONS Job Card IST 030 4 of 4

5.2.9 R2 – R3 value must be entered as follows: Select SETUP/DIFF–R/MEASURE and enter the (R2
– R3) value in mm using the NEXT and VALID keys.

5.2.10 Once (R2 – R3) value is entered, select SETUP/CALCUL.

5.2.11 The calibration procedure is now complete. Perform a checksum as follows: SETUP/GENE/
INSTAL/CKSUM.

Note: This calibration procedure adjusts the values of STP_L and STP_R to improve shutter positioning
accuracy. The new values after calibration should be close to the default values (below).
To check for correct operation of a collimator, or if you find a problem with the calibration, start
with the default parameter values given here:

Parameter Default value


JOB CARDS

CO_L 5.700 E+1


CO_R 4.100 E+1
CO_F 4.300 E–1
STP_L 2.500 E–1
STP_R 1.250 E–1

3–172
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 031 1 of 4

Purpose: TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON Version No.:


EXPOSED FILM Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
D Film and cassette of the type and size(s) used by the customer on the Senographe DMR being installed
(18 x 24 mm, plus 24 x 30 mm if this option is chosen by the customer)

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Plexiglass in thickness increments of 0.5 cm (minimum plexiglass dimensions 20 x 20 cm to insure com-

JOB CARDS
plete covering of the photo cell)

SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION This procedure produces X–rays. Be sure to take appropriate precautions.

Current Buckys (18 x 24 p/n 2231024–3 and 24 x 30 p/n 2231025–2) are fo-
CAUTION cussed for SID = 650. Use of SID = 560 is not recommended.

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
D Job Card IST 026 ”CALIBRATION OF GRID POSITION”
D Complete AEC calibration for the screen pair to be used in this test (see Installation Steering in chapter 1).

SECTION 5
TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON EXPOSED FILM
The objective is to test for correct grid movement by taking exposures and examining the developed films for
grid lines .

Generalities on gridlines observation:


This procedure describes the optimum conditions for carrying out and analyzing grid line test exposures. It
is important to emphasize, however, that detection of the grid line effect is still a SUBJECTIVE test. In partic-
ular, the following considerations must be remembered:
• It is possible to obtain a good test exposure even on a poorly–calibrated DMR unit.
A tiny variation in speed or exposure time can produce a big variation in the grid lines visibil-
ity. Several exposures, even several patient exams may be required to confirm that the grid line
problem in a system has been significantly reduced after any change in the system .

3–173
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON


EXPOSED FILM Job Card IST 031 2 of 4

• Different people, whether customers or Service Engineers, have very different visual percep-
tions of grid lines.
• When the fault is not very pronounced, it is usually not present over the entire film, but only in
certain areas (at the edge of the film, as follows):

• The following display conditions are essential for grid line observation:
• Viewer light intensity must be high and uniform,
JOB CARDS

• Use of masks around the image to be observed is recommended,


• A magnifying glass sometimes helps to detect the fault,
• The fault shows up better when the optical density of the film is not too high (OD net < 1.2).

5.1 General instructions to be observed during all procedures in this Job Card

5.1.1 The photo cell must be in its most forward position (towards the patient) throughout the procedures
in this Job Card.

5.1.2 When placing Plexiglass on the cassette holder, the Plexiglass must always overlap the front edge
(towards the patient) by about 1 cm to insure that the photo cell is fully covered.

5.2 Perform the test for absence of grid lines on exposed film.

5.2.1 Set up the Senographe DMR in contact mode with the 18 x 24 mm bucky, grid and compression
paddle installed.

5.2.2 Place 1 cm of plexiglass on the bucky.

5.2.3 Set up the following exposure:


– Mode: See table 1
– Screen Pair: Choose the screen pair name that corresponds to the film and cassette being
used for the test
– Focal spot: See table
– Track: See table
– Filter: See table
– 25 kV (initial value)
– Format: maximum aperture of collimator

3–174
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON


EXPOSED FILM Job Card IST 031 3 of 4

– Focal distance (SID): 660 mm, or SID commonly used by customer,


– Cranio–caudal projection (examination arm in vertical position) or, where appropriate,
the projection at which the customer most often sees the grid.

5.2.4 Enable visual display of parameter values when in application mode. See ”Visual Display of Param-
eter Values” in chapter 1.

5.2.5 Load the cassette with a fresh undeveloped film that corresponds to the screen pair being used for
the test and install it in the bucky.

5.2.6 Take exposure N°1 as described in Table 1.


TABLE 1
GRID LINE TEST EXPOSURES

N° Mode Track Filter Plexiglass KV mAs Expo- Comments

JOB CARDS
thickness sure
(mm) time
(ms)

1 AEC MO MO 15 25
2 AOP–CNT 15
3 AOP–CNT 25
4 AOP–CNT 35

5.2.7 Note the exposure time as displayed on the console display. If it is within the range 0.200 to 0.300
S, develop the film and proceed directly to step 5.2.10. If it is above (below) this range, increase
(decrease) the HV by 1 kV and repeat the exposure using the same undeveloped film in the cassette.
Continue increasing or decreasing the HV by 1 kV until a satisfactory exposure time is reached, then
proceed to the next step.

Note: For an unusually slow film (i.e. if the exposure time is still greater than 300 mS at 30 kV), remove
the Plexiglass from the bucky and continue the search for a satisfactory exposure time.

Note: For an unusually fast film (i.e. if the exposure time is still less than 200 mS at 22 kV), increase
the amount of Plexiglass on the bucky to 2 cm and continue the search for a satisfactory exposure
time.

5.2.8 Re–load the cassette with a fresh undeveloped film that corresponds to the screen pair being used
for the test and install it in the cassette holder.

5.2.9 Keeping the same HV value as determined above, take an exposure and develop the film.

5.2.10 Perform test exposures N°2 and develop film

5.2.11 Perform test exposures N°3 and develop film

5.2.12 Perform test exposures N°4 and develop film .

3–175
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

TEST FOR ABSENCE OF GRID LINES ON


EXPOSED FILM Job Card IST 031 4 of 4

5.2.13 If the Senographe DMR being installed is equipped with the 24 x 30 mm bucky/grid option, per-
form an exposure in the conditions of Exposure N°4 (step 5.2.12) using 24X30 option.

5.2.14 Study the developed films on a light screen with the jeweler’s loop. Verify that there are no signs
of grid lines anywhere on the exposed area of the film. Visible grid lines indicate a problem in the
grid drive train or defective offsets and gain settings. If there are visible grid lines, proceed to steps
5.2.15 to 5.2.16.

5.2.15 Re–calibrate gain and offset following the bucky trouble shooting Job Card.

5.2.16 Check also there are any sticky or rough points by moving the grid by hand back and forth across
its full range of movement.

5.2.17 If you are turning the machine back over to the user at this point, switch the Senographe DMR
off, then back on again.
JOB CARDS

3–176
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

SENOGRAPHE DMR+ Job Card IST 032 1 of 4

Purpose: REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE Version No.:


COVERS AND PANELS Date:

Time: x h xx min Personnel: 1

SECTION 1
SUPPLIES
None

SECTION 2
TOOLS
D Metric Allen wrenches
D Large flat screwdriver

JOB CARDS
SECTION 3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
None

SECTION 4
PREREQUISITES
None

SECTION 5
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE COVERS AND TRIM PANELS
This section is divided into two subsections, one for removal and replacement of generator side covers and
trim panels, and one for removal and replacement of gantry side covers and trim panels.

5.1 Remove/replace generator side covers and trim panels (see illustration 1).

5.1.1 Remove all power from the Senographe DMR by turning off the wall–mounted circuit breaker.

5.1.2 Remove the four plastic plugs from screws of generator top panel.

5.1.3 Use an Allen wrench to remove the four generator top panel retaining screws (5).

5.1.4 Remove generator top panel by lifting upwards.

3–177
GE Medical Systems SENOGRAPHE DMR+
REV 9 sm 2240777–100

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF SIDE


COVERS AND PANELS Job Card IST 032 2 of 4

5.1.5 For EACH of the four generator side panels:

1. Slightly lift the panel upwards and towards yourself.

2. Disconnect the ground wire FROM THE GENERATOR END to avoid RISK OF CREATING
SHORT CIRCUITS.

5.1.6 Perform the procedure in reverse order for replacement. BE SURE TO RE–CONNECT THE
GROUND WIRE ON EACH OF THE FOUR SIDE PANELS.

5.2 Remove/replace gantry side covers and trim panels (see illustration 1).

5.2.1 Turn off the Senographe DMR.

5.2.2 Use the screwdriver to remove screw (1).


JOB CARDS

5.2.3 Remove plastic plugs and screws (2) and (3) from each column half–cover.

5.2.4 Do not touch screws (4). Undo hex bolt (6) by 2 or 3 turns (accessible through a slot at rear of the
base).
(this method keeps alignment of covers with safety stop switches).

5.2.5 Slide complete half–cover towards you to remove it.

5.2.6 Perform the procedure in reverse order for replacement. BE CAREFUL NOT TO PINCH OR